s

Contents

Preface 1
Guide to the S7-300
SIMATIC Documentation 2

Installation Order 3
S7-300 Automation System,
4
Hardware and Installation: S7-300 Modules

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Configuring 5

Installation Manual Installation 6

Wiring 7

Addressing 8

Commissioning 9

Maintenance 10

Testing Functions, Diagnostics 11

and Fault Elimination

Appendix 12

Glossary 13
Index

This manual is part of the documentation

package with the order number:
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

Edition 06/2003
A5E00105492-03
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:

Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons
are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage

Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright © Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with
contents is not permitted without express written authority. the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary
are reserved. corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed.

Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems ©Siemens AG 2003
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00105492-03
&RQWHQWV
 3UHIDFH 

 *XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ 

 ,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU 

 60RGXOHV

 &RQILJXULQJ
5.1 Summary of the Content ...................................................................................5-1
5.2 Basic Principles of Planning ..............................................................................5-2
5.3 Component Dimensions ....................................................................................5-4
5.4 Arranging Modules on a Single Rack ................................................................5-7
5.5 Arranging Modules on Multiple Racks...............................................................5-8
5.6 Selection and installation of cabinets ..............................................................5-11
5.7 Example: Selecting a Cabinet .........................................................................5-14
5.8 Electrical Assembly, Protective Measures, and Grounding ............................5-16
5.8.1 Grounding concept and overall structure ........................................................5-16
5.8.2 Installing an S7-300 with Grounded Reference Potential ...............................5-18
5.8.3 Configuring an S7-300 with Ungrounded Reference Potential
(Not CPU 31xC)...............................................................................................5-19
5.8.4 Isolated or Non-Isolated Modules?..................................................................5-20
5.8.5 Grounding Measures .......................................................................................5-23
5.8.6 Overview: Grounding.......................................................................................5-26
5.9 Selecting the Load Power Supply ...................................................................5-28
5.10 Planning Subnets ............................................................................................5-30
5.10.1 Extending and Networking Subnets ................................................................5-30
5.10.2 Basic Principles of MPI, DP and PtP Subnets ................................................5-32
5.10.3 Interfaces.........................................................................................................5-35
5.10.4 Network Components ......................................................................................5-38
5.10.5 Cable Length ...................................................................................................5-41
5.10.6 Sample Networks ............................................................................................5-43
 ,QVWDOODWLRQ 
6.1 Installing an S7-300...........................................................................................6-1
6.2 Installing the rail.................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Installing Modules on the Rail ...........................................................................6-7
6.4 Label the modules .............................................................................................6-9

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 iii
&RQWHQWV

 :LULQJ
7.1 Wiring ................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Connecting the Protective Conductor to the Rail ..............................................7-4
7.3 Adjusting the Power Supply Module to the Mains Voltage ...............................7-5
7.4 Wiring the Power Supply Module and the CPU ................................................7-6
7.5 Wiring Front Connectors ...................................................................................7-8
7.6 Inserting Front Connectors into Modules ........................................................7-12
7.7 Labeling the Module I/O ..................................................................................7-13
7.8 Connecting Shielded Cables to the Shielding Contact Element .....................7-14
7.9 Wiring the Bus Connector ...............................................................................7-17
 $GGUHVVLQJ 
8.1 Addressing.........................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Slot-Defined Addressing of Modules .................................................................8-1
8.3 User-Defined Addressing of Modules ...............................................................8-3
8.4 Addressing Signal Modules...............................................................................8-3
8.5 Addressing the Integrated I/O of the CPU.........................................................8-6
8.6 Consistent Data .................................................................................................8-8
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ 
9.1 In this Chapter ...................................................................................................9-1
9.2 Commissioning Procedure ................................................................................9-1
9.3 Commissioning Checklist ..................................................................................9-4
9.4 Commissioning the Modules .............................................................................9-6
9.4.1 Connecting the PG ............................................................................................9-6
9.4.2 Inserting/Replacing a Micro Memory Card (MMC)..........................................9-10
9.4.3 Initial Power On ...............................................................................................9-12
9.4.4 Resetting Memory via the Mode Selector Switch of the CPU .........................9-13
9.4.5 Formatting the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ....................................................9-16
9.4.6 Starting SIMATIC Manager .............................................................................9-17
9.4.7 Monitoring and controlling I/Os........................................................................9-18
9.5 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................9-22
9.5.1 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................9-22
9.5.2 Commissioning the CPU as DP Master ..........................................................9-23
9.5.3 Commissioning the CPU as DP Slave ............................................................9-26
9.5.4 Direct Data Exchange .....................................................................................9-32
 0DLQWHQDQFH 
10.1 In this Chapter .................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Operating System Back-Up.............................................................................10-1
10.3 Updating the Operating System ......................................................................10-3
10.4 Module replacement........................................................................................10-4
10.5 Digital output module AC 120/230 V: Replacing the fuses .............................10-9

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
iv A5E00105492-03
 &RQWHQWV

 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
11.1 In this Chapter .................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Overview: Testing Functions ...........................................................................11-1
11.3 Overview: Diagnostics .....................................................................................11-4
11.4 Diagnostic options with STEP 7 ......................................................................11-6
11.5 Diagnostics with LEDs.....................................................................................11-7
11.6 Diagnostics of DP CPUs ...............................................................................11-12
11.6.1 Diagnostics of DP CPUs Operating as DP Master........................................11-12
11.6.2 Reading slave diagnostic data ......................................................................11-15
11.6.3 Interrupts on the DP Master ..........................................................................11-21
11.6.4 Structure of the Slave Diagnostic Data when the CPU is used as
an Intelligent Slave ........................................................................................11-22
 $SSHQGL[
12.1 Assembly .........................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 General Rules and Regulations for S7-300 Operation....................................12-1
12.2 Protection against Electromagnetic Interference ............................................12-3
12.2.1 Basic Points for System Installations Conforming with EMC Requirements...12-3
12.2.2 Five Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC ................................................................12-5
12.2.3 EMC Compatible Installation of PLC ...............................................................12-7
12.2.4 Examples of an EMC Compatible Installation .................................................12-9
12.2.5 Shielding of Cables .......................................................................................12-12
12.2.6 Equipotential bonding....................................................................................12-13
12.2.7 Cable Routing inside Buildings......................................................................12-15
12.2.8 Outdoor cable routing ....................................................................................12-17
12.3 Lightning and Surge Voltage Protection........................................................12-18
12.3.1 In the following sections ... ............................................................................12-18
12.3.2 Lightning Protection Zone Concept ...............................................................12-18
12.3.3 Rules for the Transition Point between Lightning Protection
Zones 0 <-> 1 ................................................................................................12-20
12.3.4 Rules for the Transition Points between Lightning Protection
Zones 1 <-> 2 and Higher .............................................................................12-22
12.3.5 Sample of a Surge Protection Circuit for Networked S7-300 PLCs ..............12-25
12.3.6 1 How to Protect Digital Output Modules against Inductive Surge Voltage ..12-27
12.4 Safety of electronic control equipment ..........................................................12-29
 *ORVVDU\

 ,QGH[

 

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 v
&RQWHQWV

)LJXUHV

1-1 Information Landscape of S7-300 ................................................................1-3

1-2 Additional Documentation ............................................................................1-4
1-3 SIMATIC Technical Support.........................................................................1-5
3-1 Installing an S7 system ................................................................................3-1
5-1 Modules in an S7-300 ..................................................................................4-1
4-1 Horizontal and vertical installation................................................................5-3
4-2 Shielding contact element ............................................................................5-5
4-3 Clearance .....................................................................................................5-6
4-4 Rack with eight signal modules ....................................................................5-8
4-5 Full assembly using racks ..........................................................................5-10
4-6 Power loss dissipated.................................................................................5-15
4-7 CPU with grounded reference potential (as supplied) ...............................5-18
4-8 Creating an ungrounded reference potential on a CPU.............................5-19
4-9 Configuration with isolated modules ..........................................................5-21
4-10 Configuration with non-isolated modules ...................................................5-22
4-11 Grounding concept for the S7-300 with CPU 31xC ...................................5-26
4-12 Grounding concept for the S7-300 (excluding CPU 31xC) ........................5-27
4-13 Example: S7-300 with load power supply from PS 307 .............................5-29
4-14 Example of an MPI subnet .........................................................................5-43
4-15 Example: Maximum distances in the MPI subnet ......................................5-44
4-16 Example of a PROFIBUS subnet ...............................................................5-45
4-17 Example: CPU 314C-2 DP as MPI and PROFIBUS nodes .......................5-46
4-18 Example of PG access across network boundaries (routing) ....................5-47
4-19 Installing the terminating resistors in an MPI subnet .................................5-48
6-1 Holes for mounting the 2 m rail ....................................................................6-4
6-2 Free space required for an S7-300 installation ............................................6-6
6-3 Inserting slot numbers in modules .............................................................6-10
7-1 connecting the protective conductor to the rail ............................................7-4
7-2 Setting the mains voltage selector switch for the PS 307 ............................7-5
7-3 Wiring the power supply module and the CPU ............................................7-7
7-4 Move the front connector into wiring position.............................................7-10
7-5 Slide the labeled strips into the front panel ................................................7-13
7-6 Shielding contact element underneath two signal modules .......................7-15
7-7 Connecting 2-wire cables to the shielding contact element.......................7-16
7-8 Bus connector: Enabled and disabled terminating resistor........................7-18
8-1 S7-300 slots and the associated module start addresses ...........................8-2
8-2 Addresses of the I/O of digital modules .......................................................8-4
8-3 I/O Addresses of a digital module in Slot 4 ..................................................8-5
8-4 I/O addresses of an analog module in Slot 4 ...............................................8-6
9-1 Connecting a PG to an S7-300 ....................................................................9-6
9-2 Connecting a PG to multiple S7-300 PLCs ..................................................9-7
9-3 Connecting a PG to a subnet .......................................................................9-8
9-4 PG connected to an ungrounded S7-300.....................................................9-9
9-5 Insert the micro memory card into the CPU ...............................................9-11
9-6 Using the mode selector switch to reset the memory ................................9-14
9-7 Intermediate memory in a DP CPU operating as a DP slave ....................9-29
9-8 Direct data exchange with CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP.............................9-33
10-1 Unlocking the front connector and removing the module...........................10-5
10-2 Removing the front connector coding pin...................................................10-6
10-3 Installing a new module..............................................................................10-7
10-4 Inserting the front connector ......................................................................10-8
10-5 Location of fuses in the digital output module 120/230 VAC ...................10-10

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
vi A5E00105492-03
 &RQWHQWV

11-1 Principle of forcing in S7-300 CPUs...........................................................11-3

11-2 Diagnostics with CPU 31x-2.....................................................................11-12
11-3 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves .............................11-13
11-4 Diagnostic address for the receiving station with direct data exchange ..11-15
11-5 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves .............................11-19
11-6 Structure of slave diagnostic data ............................................................11-22
11-7 Structure of the ID-specific diagnostics for CPU 31x-2............................11-25
11-8 Structure of the module status .................................................................11-26
11-9 Structure of the interrupt status................................................................11-27
11-10 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for a diagnostic interrupt (operating status
change by intelligent slave) ......................................................................11-28
11-11 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for the diagnostic interrupt (SFB 75) ............................11-29
12-1 Possible paths of electromagnetic interference .........................................12-3
12-2 Example of an EMC compatible cabinet installation ..................................12-9
12-3 Example of EMC compatible wall-mounting ............................................12-11
12-4 Mounting cable shielding..........................................................................12-13
12-5 Equipotential bonding...............................................................................12-14
12-6 Lightning protection zones of a building...................................................12-19
12-7 Sample circuit for networked S7-300 PLCs .............................................12-25
12-8 EMERGENCY-OFF relay contact in the output circuit.............................12-27
12-9 Circuit for coils operated with DC voltage ................................................12-28
12-10 Circuit for coils operated with AC voltage ................................................12-28

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 vii
&RQWHQWV

7DEOHV

2-1 Influence of the ambient conditions on the automation system (AS)............2-1

2-2 Electrical isolation .........................................................................................2-1
2-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the automation system ....2-2
2-4 Use of centralized and decentralized peripherals .........................................2-2
2-5 Configuration consisting of the central processing unit (CPU) and
expansion modules (EMs)............................................................................2-2
2-6 CPU performance .........................................................................................2-2
2-7 Communication .............................................................................................2-3
2-8 Software ........................................................................................................2-3
2-9 Supplementary features ................................................................................2-3
5-1 Components of an S7-300: ...........................................................................4-2
4-1 Rails - overview .............................................................................................5-4
4-2 Module width .................................................................................................5-4
4-3 Shielding terminals - overview ......................................................................5-5
4-4 Interface modules - Overview .......................................................................5-8
4-5 Types of cabinet ..........................................................................................5-13
4-6 Choice of cabinets.......................................................................................5-15
4-7 VDE specifications for the installation of a PLC system .............................5-17
4-8 Protective grounding measures ..................................................................5-23
4-9 Connection of the load voltage reference potential ....................................5-25
4-10 Connection of the load voltage reference potential....................................5-26
4-11 Connection of the load voltage reference potential....................................5-27
4-12 Characteristics of load power supply units.................................................5-28
4-13 Nodes on the subnet ..................................................................................5-32
4-14 MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses..................................................................5-33
4-15 MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300 ..................................................5-34
4-16 Possible interface operating modes for CPU 317-2 DP.............................5-36
4-17 The following devices may be connected ..................................................5-37
4-18 Available bus cables...................................................................................5-38
4-19 Marginal conditions for wiring interior bus cables ......................................5-39
4-20 Bus connector ............................................................................................5-39
4-21 RS 485 repeater .........................................................................................5-40
4-22 PG patch cord ............................................................................................5-40
4-23 Permitted cable lengths in an MPI subnet segment...................................5-41
4-24 Permitted cable lengths in a PROFIBUS subnet segment.........................5-41
4-25 Stub cable lengths per segment.................................................................5-42
6-1 Module accessories ......................................................................................6-2
6-2 Installation tools and materials......................................................................6-3
6-3 Mounting holes for rails .................................................................................6-5
6-4 Slot numbers for S7 modules........................................................................6-9
7-1 Wiring accessories ........................................................................................7-1
7-2 Conditions for connecting the PS and CPU ..................................................7-2
7-3 Wiring conditions for front connectors...........................................................7-3
7-4 Assignment of front connectors to modules..................................................7-8
7-5 Assignment of front connectors to modules................................................7-10
7-6 Wiring the front connector ...........................................................................7-11
7-7 Assigning the labeling strips to modules .....................................................7-13
7-8 Assigning the shielding diameter to shielding terminals .............................7-14
8-1 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 312C ..........................................8-6
8-2 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C ..........................................8-7
8-3 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C-2 PtP/DP ..........................8-7
8-4 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 314C-2 PtP/DP ..........................8-8

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
viii A5E00105492-03
 &RQWHQWV

9-1 Recommended commissioning procedure - part I: Hardware ......................9-2

9-2 Recommended commissioning procedure - part II: software .......................9-3
9-3 Possible causes for the CPU memory reset request ..................................9-13
9-4 Procedure for resetting the CPU memory...................................................9-13
9-5 Operations in the CPU during a memory reset ...........................................9-15
9-6 Software requirements ................................................................................9-22
9-7 DP address areas of the CPUs ...................................................................9-23
9-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP master .........9-25
9-9 Event recognition for CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP slave............9-28
9-10 Configuration example for the address areas in intermediate memory .....9-29
10-1 Back-up of operating system on MMC .......................................................10-2
10-2 Updating the operating system with MC/MMC...........................................10-3
11-1 The differences between forcing and modifying variables .........................11-3
11-2 Status and error displays ...........................................................................11-7
11-3 Evaluation of the SF LED (software error) .................................................11-8
11-4 Evaluation of the SF LED (hardware error)................................................11-9
11-5 The BUSF, BUSF1 and BUSF2 LEDs .....................................................11-10
11-6 The BUSF LED lights up. .........................................................................11-11
11-7 The BUSF LED flashes ............................................................................11-11
11-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 as the DP master ...............................11-14
11-9 Evaluation in the DP master of RUN to STOP transitions by the
DP slave ...................................................................................................11-14
11-10 Reading the diagnostic information using STEP 5 and STEP 7
in the masters system ..............................................................................11-16
11-11 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 acting as the DP slave .......................11-20
11-12 Evaluation of RUN to STOP transitions in the DP master/DP slave........11-20
11-13 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0) ........................................................11-23
11-14 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1) ........................................................11-23
11-15 Structure of station status 3 (byte 2) ........................................................11-24
11-16 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address (byte 3) ..............................11-24
11-17 Structure of the vendor ID (byte 4, 5).......................................................11-24
12-1 Starting the system after specific events....................................................12-1
12-2 Mains voltage .............................................................................................12-2
12-3 Protection against external electrical interference .....................................12-2
12-4 Protection against external electrical interference .....................................12-2
12-5 Coupling mechanisms ................................................................................12-4
12-6 Key to example 1......................................................................................12-10
12-7 Routing cables inside buildings................................................................12-15
12-8 High-voltage protection of cables with surge voltage protection
components ..............................................................................................12-21
12-9 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection
zones 1 <-> 2 ...........................................................................................12-23
12-10 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection
zones 2 <-> 3 ...........................................................................................12-24
12-11 Example of a lightning-protected structure (key to figure above) ............12-26

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 ix
&RQWHQWV

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
x A5E00105492-03


3UHIDFH

3XUSRVHRIWKLVPDQXDO
To get you started, this manual contains the information you will need to plan,
assemble, wire up, address and commission a S7-300.
You will then get to know the tools you can use to diagnose and eliminate errors in
hardware and software.

%DVLFNQRZOHGJHUHTXLUHG
To understand this manual you will require a general knowledge of automation
technology, backed up by a knowledge of the STEP 7 basic software. You may find
it useful to read the Programming with STEP 7 V5.1 manual first.

6FRSHRIWKHPDQXDO
This manual is applicable to the following CPUs and hardware and software
versions:

&38 &RQYHQWLRQ 2UGHU1R $VRIYHUVLRQ

7KH&38VDUHUHIHUUHG )LUPZDUH +DUGZDUH
WRLQWKLVPDQXDODV
IROORZV
CPU 312C CPU 31xC 6ES7312-5BD01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C 6ES7313-5BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 PtP 6ES7313-6BE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 313C-2 DP 6ES7313-6CE01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 PtP 6ES7314-6BF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314C-2 DP 6ES7314-6CF01-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 312 CPU 31x 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 314 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V2.0.0 01
CPU 317-2 DP 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V2.1.0 01

1RWH
This manual describes all modules available at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to enclose Product Information for new modules or new
versions of modules containing up-to-date information.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 1-1
3UHIDFH

$SSURYDOV
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series has the following approvals:
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control
Equipment)
• Factory Mutual Research: Approval Standard Class Number 3611

&(PDUN
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series conforms to the requirements and safety
specifications of following EU directives:
• EU directive 73/23/EWE "Low-voltage directive"
• EU directive 89/336/EEC "EMC directive“

&WLFNPDUN
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with AS/NZS 2064 (Australia).

6WDQGDUGV
The SIMATIC S7-300 product series is compliant with the requirements and criteria
for IEC 61131-2.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
1-2 A5E00105492-03
 3UHIDFH

'RFXPHQWDWLRQUHTXLUHG
This manual is part of the documentation package for the S7-300.

Reference Manual

CPU Specifications: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP Description of the operation, the functions and the
technical data of the CPU
CPU Specifications: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x

Manual

CPU 31xC: Technological Functions Description of the individual technological functions:

- Positioning
Examples - Counting
- Point-to-point connection
- Control
The CD contains examples of the technological
functions.

Installation Manual

S7-300 Automation System, Configuration, installation, wiring, network and

Hardware and Installation: commissioning descriptions of a S7-300
CPU 312 IFM - 318-2 DP
You are reading this manual

S7-300 Automation System,

Hardware and Installation:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x

Reference Manual

S7-300 Programmable Controller Function descriptions and the technical data of the
Module Specifications signal modules, power supply modules and the
interface modules

Instruction List
List of stored instructions of the CPUs and their
CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP execution times.
List of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their
CPU 31xC, CPU 31x execution times.
IM 151-7 CPU, BM 147-1 CPU, BM 147-2 CPU
Getting Started

Getting Starteds take you through each - CPU 31x: Commission

commissioning step up to a functioning
application by running through a - CPU 31xC: Commission
concrete example.
- CPU 314C: Positioning with Analog Output
The following Getting Starteds are available - CPU 314C: Positioning with Digital Output
to you:
- CPU 31xC: Counting
- CPU 31xC: Point-to-Point Connection
- CPU 31xC: Controlling

Figure 1-1 Information Landscape of S7-300

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 1-3
3UHIDFH

You also require the following manuals in addition to this documentation package:

Reference Manual System Software for

S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions

Reference Manual Description of the SFCs, SFBs and OBS of the CPU.
part of the STEP 7 documentation package You can also find the description in the
STEP 7 Online Help.

Figure 1-2 Additional Documentation

)XUWKHUVXSSRUW
If you still have questions about how to use the products described in this manual,
then please contact your local Siemens dealer.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner

7UDLQLQJ&HQWHU
We can provide training courses to help you get started with your S7-300 PLC.
Please contact your local Training Center or the Central Training Center in
Nuremberg, D-90327, Germany
Phone +499 (911) 895-3200..
http://www.sitrain.com

6,0$7,&GRFXPHQWDWLRQRQWKH,QWHUQHW
Public documentation is available on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Use the quick search of the Knowledge Manager to find your required
documentation. If you have questions or suggestions concerning the
documentation, you can post them on the forum, and they will be answered
quickly.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
1-4 A5E00105492-03
 3UHIDFH

6,0$7,&7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW
In addition to your local dealer, you can also contact one of three Support Centers:

Johnson City
Nuernberg

Beijing

Figure 1-3 SIMATIC Technical Support

:RUOGZLGH (Nuremberg)
7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW

Local time: 0:00 to 24:00 / 365

days a year
Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223
E-mail: [email protected]
GMT: +1:00
(XURSH$IULFD (Nuremberg) $PHULFD (Johnson City) $VLD$XVWUDOLD (Beijing)
$XWKRUL]DWLRQ 7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUWDQG 7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUWDQG
Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 $XWKRUL]DWLRQ $XWKRUL]DWLRQ

Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00 Local time: Mo.-Fr. 8:00 to 17:00

Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Phone: +1 (0) 770 740 3505 Phone: +65 (0) 740-7000

E-mail: [email protected] Fax: +1 (0) 770 740 3699 Fax: +65 (0) 740-7001

GMT: +1:00 E-Mail: isd- E-mail:

[email protected] [email protected]
GMT: -5:00 GMT: +8:00
Technical Support and Authorization personnel generally speak both German and English.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 1-5
3UHIDFH

6HUYLFH 6XSSRUWRQWKH,QWHUQHW
We offer you our complete knowledge base online on the Internet as a supplement
to our documentation.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
There you can find:
• Up-to-date product information (What's new), FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions), Downloads, Tips and Tricks.
• Our Newsletter always offers you the latest information on your products.
• The Knowledge Manager finds the documents you require.
• Users and specialists all over the world share their experience in our Forum.
• You can find your local service partner for Automation & Drives in our Partner
Database.
• Information relating to on-site service, repairs, spare parts and lots more is
available to you in the "Service" section.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
1-6 A5E00105492-03


*XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
you will find a guide to the documentation for the S7-300.

6HOHFWLQJDQGFRQILJXULQJ

Table 2-1 Influence of the ambient conditions on the automation system (AS)

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
What provisions do I have to make for PLC Chapter &RQILJXULQJ0RXQWLQJGLPHQVLRQVRI
installation space? PRGXOHVand 0RXQWLQJPRXQWLQJWKHUDLO, in the
,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do environmental conditions influence the $SSHQGL[RIWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
PLC?

Table 2-2 Electrical isolation

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which modules can I use if electrical isolation is Chapter &RQILJXULQJ(OHFWULFDODVVHPEO\
required between sensors/actuators? SURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHVDQGJURXQGLQJLQWKH
,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Reference Manual 0RGXOH'DWD
When do I need to isolate the potential of individual Chapter &RQILJXULQJ(OHFWULFDODVVHPEO\
components? SURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHVDQGJURXQGLQJLQWKH
How do I wire that? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Chapter :LULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
When do I need to isolate the potential of specific Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJDVXEQHWLQWKH
stations? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do I wire that? Chapter :LULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 2-1
*XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

Table 2-3 Communication between sensors/actuators and the automation system

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which module is suitable for my sensor/actuator? for CPU: in applicable &38'DWDReference
Manual
for signal modules: 0RGXOH'DWDReference Manual
How many sensors/actuators can I connect to the for CPU: in applicable &38'DWDReference
module? Manual
for signal modules: 0RGXOH'DWDReference Manual
To connect my sensors/actuators to the PLC, how Chapter :LULQJ:LULQJIURQWFRQQHFWRUVLQWKH
do I wire the front connector ? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
When do I require expansion modules (EM), and Chapter &RQILJXULQJRSWLRQDOH[SDQVLRQVDQG
how are they connected? QHWZRUNLQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
How do I mount modules in module racks / on Chapter 0RXQWLQJ0RXQWLQJPRGXOHVRQDUDLOLQ
profile rails? WKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO

Table 2-4 Use of centralized and decentralized peripherals

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which range of modules do I want to use? for local I/O / expansion modules (EMs): 0RGXOH
'DWDReference Manual
for distributed I/Os / PROFIBUS DP: Manual of the
relevant I/O device, e.g. 0DQXDO(7%

Table 2-5 Configuration consisting of the central processing unit (CPU) and expansion modules (EMs)

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which rack / rail is best suited to my application? Chapter &RQILJXULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Which Interface modules (IM) do I need to connect Chapter &RQILJXULQJ$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQ
EMs to the CPU? PXOWLSOHUDFNVLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
What is the right power supply (PS) for my Chapter &RQILJXULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
application?

Table 2-6 CPU performance

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which memory concept is best suited for my in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
application?
How do I insert and remove Micro Memory Cards? Chapter &RPPLVVLRQLQJ5HPRYLQJ,QVWDOOLQJ0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUGVLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
Which CPU meets my requirements on ,QVWUXFWLRQOLVW; Reference Manual &38'DWD
performance ?
How fast is the response / processing time of the in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
CPU?
Which technological functions are implemented? 7HFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQVManual
How can I use these technological functions? 7HFKQRORJLFDOIXQFWLRQVManual

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
2-2 A5E00105492-03
 *XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

Table 2-7 Communication

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which principles do I have to take into account? &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&Manual
Which options and resources are available on the in applicable &38'DWDReference Manual
CPU ?
How do I optimize communication with the help of the respective manual
communication processors (CPs)?
Which type of communication network is best Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJDVXEQHWLQWKH
suited to my application? ,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
&RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&Manual
How do I network the individual components? Chapter &RQILJXULQJ and ZLULQJLQWKH,QVWDOODWLRQ
0DQXDO

Table 2-8 Software

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
Which software do I require for my S7-300 system? Chapter 7HFKQLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQ; applicable &38
'DWDReference Manual

Table 2-9 Supplementary features

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ LVDYDLODEOHLQ
How do I implement operator control and for text-based display units: the relevant device
monitoring? manual
(Human Machine Interface) for OPs: the relevant device manual
for WinCC: the relevant device manual
How can I integrate process control modules? for PCS 7: the respective device manual
What options are offered by redundant and fail-safe Manual 6+5HGXQGDQW6\VWHPV; Manual
systems? )DLOVDIH6\VWHPV

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 2-3
*XLGHWRWKH6'RFXPHQWDWLRQ

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
2-4 A5E00105492-03


,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
We will show you the sequence of steps you must follow to install your SIMATIC-
S7 system.
We shall then go on to explain the basic rules that you should follow, and how you
can modify an existing system.

3URFHGXUHIRULQVWDOOLQJDQ6V\VWHP

Configuration

Installation

Wiring

Should a subnet
YES Network
be created?

NO

Addressing

Installation completed,
continue with commissioning

Figure 3-1 Installing an S7 system

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 3-1
,QVWDOODWLRQ2UGHU

%DVLFUXOHVIRUWURXEOHIUHHRSHUDWLRQRI6
An S7 system can be used in many different ways, so we can only provide basic
rules for the electrical and mechanical installation in this section.
You must at least keep to these basic rules if you want your S7 system to operate
correctly.

0RGLI\LQJWKHVWUXFWXUHRIDQH[LVWLQJ6V\VWHP
If you want to modify the configuration of an existing system at a later time,
proceed using the steps indicated above.

1RWH
If you want to install a signal module at a later time, consult the relevant
information for the respective module.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Also note the description of your specific module in the 6,0$7,&63/&V
manual and the0RGXOH'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
3-2 A5E00105492-03


60RGXOHV

:KLFKPRGXOHVFDQ\RXXVHWRFUHDWHDQ6"
An S7-300 consists of several modules. The following diagram illustrates a
possible configuration:

1 2 3
SF
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

4
SF
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

Figure 4-1 Modules in an S7-300

7KHGLDJUDP WKHIROORZLQJPRGXOHVRIDQ6
LOOXVWUDWHVXQGHU
QXPEHU
 Power supply (PS)
 Central processing unit (CPU)
The example in the figure shows a CPU 31xC with integrated I/O.
 Signal module (SM)
 PROFIBUS bus cable
 Cable for connecting a programming device (PG)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 4-1
60RGXOHV

A programming device (PG) is used to program the S7-300 PLC. Use a PG cable
to connect the PG and the CPU.
Several S7-300 CPUs can communicate with one another and with other
SIMATIC S7 PLCs via the PROFIBUS cable. You can connect several S7-300s
using a PROFIBUS bus cable.

6PRGXOHV
There is a whole range of components available for creating and using an S7-300.
The table below shows the major modules and their functions.

Table 4-1 Components of an S7-300:

&RPSRQHQWV )XQFWLRQ ,OOXVWUDWLRQ

Rail This is the rack for an S7-300
Accessory:
Shielding contact element

Power supply (PS) This converts the line voltage

(120/230 VAC) to 24 VDC
operating voltage and is used to
supply the S7-300 and 24 VDC
load circuits

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
4-2 A5E00105492-03
 60RGXOHV

&RPSRQHQWV )XQFWLRQ ,OOXVWUDWLRQ

CPU This runs the user program, SIEMENS

Accessory: supplies 5 V to the S7-300

Front connectors (for CPUs with backplane bus; communicates
integrated peripherals) with other nodes of an MPI
network via the MPI interface.
Additional properties of specific
CPUs:
e.g., CPU 31xC
• DP master or DP slave in a
PROFIBUS subnet SIEMENS

• Technological functions
• Point-to-point connection

e.g., CPU 312, 314, or 315-2 DP

BF1 SF

BF2
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP

RUN
STOP
MRES

e.g., CPU 317-2 DP

Signal modules (SM) They match different process
(Digital input modules, digital signal levels to the S7-300.
output modules, digital I/O
modules, analog input modules,
analog output modules, analog
I/O modules)
Accessory:
Front connectors
Function modules (FM) These perform time-critical and
Accessory: memory-intensive process signal
Front connectors processing tasks, such as
positioning or regulation.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 4-3
60RGXOHV

&RPSRQHQWV )XQFWLRQ ,OOXVWUDWLRQ

Communication processor (CP). This performs communication for
Accessory: the CPU, e.g. CP 342-5 DP
Connecting cable connection to PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC TOP connect Use for wiring the digital I/O

Accessory: modules
Front connector module with
ribbon cable terminals
Interface module (IM) Connects the individual rows in
Accessory: an S7-300
Connecting cable

PROFIBUS cable with bus Connect the nodes of an MPI or

connector PROFIBUS subnet to one
another

PG cable Connects a PG/PC to a CPU

RS485 repeater Used to amplify the signals in an

MPI or PROFIBUS subnet and
for coupling segments of an MPI
or PROFIBUS subnet

Programming device (PG) or PC You will need a PG to configure,

with the STEP 7 software set parameters, program and test
package your S7-300

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
4-4 A5E00105492-03


&RQILJXULQJ

 6XPPDU\RIWKH&RQWHQW

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we will provide you with all the information you need
• Mechanical configuration of an S7-300
• Electrical configuration of an S7-300
• Considerations for networking

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQRQQHWZRUNLQJ
For information on network topics we recommend the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK
6,0$7,&Manual. This manual contains important notes on networking for
SIMATIC professionals as well as the basics for newcomers.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Information on ambient conditions is in the Appendix: see $PELHQW&RQGLWLRQV
Information on special protective measures is in the Appendix: see (OHFWULFDO
3URWHFWLYH0HDVXUHV

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-1
&RQILJXULQJ

 %DVLF3ULQFLSOHVRI3ODQQLQJ

,PSRUWDQWLQIRUPDWLRQDERXWSODQQLQJ

:DUQLQJ
2SHQHTXLSPHQW
The modules that make up an S7-300 are regarded as open equipment. This
means that you must always install the S7-300 in a cubicle, cabinet or electrical
control room that can only be accessed using a key or tool. Only trained or
authorized personnel are allowed access to such cubicles, cabinets or electrical
operating rooms.

&DXWLRQ
Depending on the field of application, the operation of an S7-300 in a plant or
system is defined by special rules and regulations . Note the safety and accident
prevention regulations relating to specific applications, e.g. machine protection
directives. This chapter and the appendix *HQHUDOUXOHVDQGUHJXODWLRQVRQ6
RSHUDWLRQ provide an overview of the most important rules you need to consider
when integrating an S7-300 into a plant or a system.

&HQWUDOXQLW&8DQGH[SDQVLRQPRGXOH(0

An S7-300 PLC consists of a central unit (CU) and – if required – one or multiple
expansion modules (EMs).
The rack containing the CPU is referred to as the central unit (CU). Racks
equipped with modules form the expansion modules (EMs) connected to the
system's CU.

:KHQVKRXOG,XVHH[SDQVLRQPRGXOHV"
You can use EMs if the number of CU slots is insufficient for your application.
When using EMs, you might require further power supply modules in addition to
the extra racks and interface modules (IM). When using interface modules you
must ensure compatibility of the partner stations.

0RGXOHUDFNV
The rack for your S7-300 is a rail. You can use this rail to mount all modules of
your S7-300 system.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-2 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

+RUL]RQWDODQGYHUWLFDOLQVWDOODWLRQ
You can mount an S7-300 either vertically or horizontally. The following ambient air
temperatures are permitted:
• Vertical installation: from 0 °C to 40 °C
• Horizontal installation: from 0 °C to 60 °C.
Always install the CPU and power supply on the left or at the bottom.

SM
SM
SM
SM 2
SF

SM
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

SM PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM 3
SM
SM

CPU
SIEMENS

FRCE

STOP
BUSF
DC5V

RUN
SF

PS

Figure 5-1 Horizontal and vertical installation

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Vertical installation of an S7-300
 Horizontal installation of an S7-300
 Rail

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
• the selection and dimensions of rails (racks) can be found in Chapter 0RGXOH
GLPHQVLRQV
• connections and interfaces (IMs) are found in Chapter $UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQ
PXOWLSOHUDFNV
• the most important rules on S7-300 operation are found in the Appendix
*HQHUDOUXOHVDQGUHJXODWLRQVRQ6RSHUDWLRQ

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-3
&RQILJXULQJ

 &RPSRQHQW'LPHQVLRQV

/HQJWKRIWKHUDLOV
The following rails are available.

Table 5-1 Rails - overview

5DLOOHQJWK 8VDEOHOHQJWKIRUPRGXOHV 2UGHU1R

160 mm 120 mm ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0
482.6 mm 450 mm ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0
530 mm 480 mm ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0
830 mm 780 mm ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0
2,000 mm cut to length if required ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

In contrast to other rails, the 2-meter rail is not equipped with any fixing holes.
These must be drilled, allowing optimal adaptation of the 2-meter rail to your
application.

,QVWDOODWLRQGLPHQVLRQVRIPRGXOHV

Table 5-2 Module width

0RGXOH :LGWK
Power supply PS 307, 2 A 50 mm
Power supply PS 307, 5 A 80 mm
Power supply PS 307, 10 A 200 mm
CPU The installation dimensions are listed in
the Technical Data section of your &38
'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO.
Analog I/O modules 40 mm
Digital I/O modules 40 mm
Simulator module SM 374 40 mm
Interface modules IM 360 and IM 365 40 mm
Interface module IM 361 80 mm

• Module height: 125 mm

• Module height with VKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW: 185 mm
• Maximum mounting depth: 130 mm
• Maximum mounting depth of a CPU with an inserted DP connector with angled
cable outlet: 140 mm
• Maximum mounting depth with open hinged front panel (CPU): 180 mm
Dimensions of other modules such as CPs, FMs etc. are found in the relevant
manuals.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-4 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

6KLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
The direct contact between the shielding contact element and the rail makes it
easy for you to connect all shielded cables of your S7 modules to ground.

Figure 5-2 Shielding contact element

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Shielding terminals
 Bracket

Mount the bracket (Order No. 6ES5 390-5AA0-0AA0) to the rail using the two
screw bolts. If you use a shielding contact element, the specified dimensions apply
from the lower edge of the module.
• Width of the shielding contact element: 80 mm
• Number of mountable shielding terminalsper shielding contact element: max 4

Table 5-3 Shielding terminals - overview

&DEOHZLWKVKLHOGLQJGLDPHWHU 6KLHOGLQJWHUPLQDORUGHUQR
Cable shielding diameter 2 mm to 6 mm 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
Cable shielding diameter 3 mm to 8 mm 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
Cable shielding diameter 4 mm to 13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-5
&RQILJXULQJ

5HTXLUHGFOHDUDQFHV
You must maintain the clearance shown in the figure in order to provide sufficient
space to install the modules and to dissipate the heat generated by the modules.
The S7-300 assembly on multiple racks shown in the figure below specifies the
clearance between racks and adjacent components, cable ducts, cabinet walls etc.
For example, if you wire your modules using a cable duct, the clearance between
the bottom edge of the shielding contact element and the cable duct must be 40
mm.

40 mm

CPU SM SM SM

40 mm 2
1 200 mm + a

40 mm a

PS CPU SM SM

20 mm 20 mm

40 mm

Figure 5-3 Clearance

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Wiring using a cable duct
 Clearance between cable channel and bottom edge of shielding contact element
must be 40 mm

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-6 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

 $UUDQJLQJ0RGXOHVRQD6LQJOH5DFN

$UH\RXXVLQJRQHRUPRUHUDFNV"
The number of racks you need will depend on your application.
5HDVRQVIRUXVLQJDVLQJOHUDFN
• Compact, space-saving use of all your modules
• Centralized use of your modules
• Fewer signals to be processed
5HDVRQVIRUGLVWULEXWLQJPRGXOHVEHWZHHQVHYHUDOUDFNV
• More signals to be processed
• Insufficient slots available
7LS:
If you opt for installation on a single rack, insert a dummy module to the right of the
CPU (order no.: 6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0). This gives you the option of inserting a
second rack for your application in the future, simply by replacing the dummy
module with an interface module and without having to reinstall and rewire the first
rack.

5XOHV$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQDVLQJOHUDFN
The following rules apply to single-rack module installations:
• No more than eight modules (SM, FM, CP) may be installed to the right of the
CPU.
• All modules mounted on a rack must not consume more than a total of 1.2 A
from the S7-300 backplane bus.

7KHSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQRIPRGXOHV
is listed under the technical data, e.g. 60RGXOH'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOor in
the 5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOfor your CPU

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-7
&RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH
The figure below shows the arrangement of eight signal modules in an S7-300
assembly.

SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

PS CPU SM1 SM2 SM3 SM4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8

Figure 5-4 Rack with eight signal modules

VHHDOVR
Arranging Modules on Multiple Racks

 $UUDQJLQJ0RGXOHVRQ0XOWLSOH5DFNV

([FHSWLRQV
With CPU 312 and CPU 312C, only a single-row configuration on a rack is
possible.

8VLQJLQWHUIDFHPRGXOHV
If you are planning a structure distributed between multiple racks then you will
need interface modules (IM). Interface modules route the backplane bus of an
S7-300 to the next rack.
The CPU is always located on rack 0.

Table 5-4 Interface modules - Overview

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV 7ZRRUPRUHURZV /RZFRVWURZFRQILJXUDWLRQ

Send IM in rack 0 IM 360 IM 365
Order No.: 6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0 Order No.: 6ES7 365-0AB00-0AA0
Receive IM in rack 1 to 3 IM 361 IM 365 (hardwired to send IM 365)
Order No.: 6ES7 361-3CA01-0AA0
Maximum number of 3 1
expansion modules
Length of the connecting 1 m (6ES7 368-3BB01-0AA0) 1 m (hardwired)
cables 2.5 m (6ES7 368-3BC51-0AA0)
5 m (6ES7 368-3BF01-0AA0)
10 m (6ES7 368-3CB01-0AA0)
Remarks - Rack 1 can only receive signal
modules; total current load is limited
to 1.2 A, whereby the maximum for
rack 1 is 0.8 A
These restrictions do not apply to
operation with interface modules
IM 360/IM 361

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-8 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

5XOHV$UUDQJLQJPRGXOHVRQPXOWLSOHUDFNV
Please note the following points if you wish to arrange your modules on multiple
racks:
• The interface module always uses slot 3 (slot 1: power supply; slot 2: CPU, slot
3: interface module)
• It is always on the left before the first signal module.
• No more than 8 modules (SM, FM, CP) are permitted per rack.
• The number of modules (SM, FM, CP) is limited by the permitted current load
on the S7-300 backplane bus. The total power consumption must not exceed
1.2 A per row.

1RWH
The power consumption of the individual modules is given in the 0RGXOH'DWD
5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO

5XOHV,QWHUIHUHQFHSURRILQVWDOODWLRQRIWKHFRQQHFWLRQ
Special shielding and grounding measures are not required if you interconnect the
CU and EM using suitable interface modules (Send IM and Receive IM).
However, you must ensure that
• all racks are interconnected with low impedance,
• the racks of a grounded assembly are grounded in a star pattern,
• the contact springs on the racks are clean and not bent, thus ensuring that
interference currents are dissipated.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-9
&RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOHRIDIXOODVVHPEO\
The figure shows the arrangement of modules in an S7-300 assembly on 4 racks.

4 IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8

5 6

3 PS IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8

2 PS IM
IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8

1 PS CPU IM
IM SM1 SM2 SM3 SM 4 SM5 SM6 SM7 SM8

Figure 5-5 Full assembly using racks

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Rack 0 (central unit)
 Rack 1 (expansion module)
 Rack 2 (expansion module)
 Rack 3 (expansion module)
 Connection cable 368
 Restriction for CPU 31xC: when this CPU is used, you must not insert Signal Module 8 on Rack 4.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-10 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

 6HOHFWLRQDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDELQHWV

5HDVRQVIRULQVWDOOLQJDQ6LQDFDELQHW
You should install your S7-300 in a cabinet when any of the following apply:
• If you plan a larger system
• You are using your S7-300s in an environment subject to interference or
contamination
• In order to meet UL/CSA requirements, which require installation in cabinets

6HOHFWLQJDQGGLPHQVLRQLQJFDELQHWV
Take the following criteria into account:
• Ambient conditions at the cabinet's place of installation
• The specified mounting clearance for racks (rails)
• Total power loss of all components in the cabinet
The ambient conditions (temperature, humidity, dust, chemical influence, explosion
hazard) at the cabinet's place of installation determine the degree of protection
(IP xx) required for the cabinet.

5HIHUHQFHIRUGHJUHHVRISURWHFWLRQ
Further information on degree of protection can be found in IEC 529 and
DIN 40050.

7KHFDELQHW
VSRZHUGLVVLSDWLRQ
The power dissipation capability of a cabinet depends on its type, ambient
temperature and on the internal arrangement of devices.

5HIHUHQFHIRUSRZHUORVV
Siemens catalogs NV21 and ET1 contain more detailed information about power
dissipation.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-11
&RQILJXULQJ

6SHFLILFDWLRQVIRUFDELQHWGLPHQVLRQV
Note the following specifications when you determine the dimensions of a cabinet
suitable for an S7-300 installation:
• Space required for racks (rails)
• Minimum clearance between the racks and cabinet walls
• Minimum clearance between the racks
• Space required for cable ducts or fans
• Position of the stays

:DUQLQJ
Modules may get damaged if exposed to inadmissible ambient temperatures.

5HIHUHQFHIRUDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHV
Information on permissible ambient temperatures is in the Appendix: see $PELHQW
&RQGLWLRQV

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-12 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

2YHUYLHZRIW\SLFDOFDELQHWW\SHV
The table below gives you an overview of the commonly used cabinet types. It
shows you the applied principle of heat dissipation, the calculated maximum power
loss and the degree of protection.

Table 5-5 Types of cabinet

2SHQFDELQHWV &ORVHGFDELQHWV
Enclosed Increased Natural convection Forced convection Forced convection
ventilation via enclosed with rack fan, with heat
natural convection ventilation improvement of exchanger, internal
natural convection and external
auxiliary ventilation

Mainly inherent Higher heat Heat dissipation Heat dissipation Heat dissipation by
heat dissipation, dissipation with only across the only across the heat exchange
with a small portion increased air cabinet wall; only cabinet wall. between heated
across the cabinet movement. low power losses Forced convection internal air and
wall. permitted. In most of the interior air cool external air.
cases heat improves heat The increased
concentration dissipation and surface of the
develops at the top prevention of heat pleated profile of
of the cabinet concentration. the heat exchanger
interior. wall and forced
convection of
internal and
external air provide
good heat
dissipation.
Degree of Degree of Degree of Degree of Degree of
protection IP 20 protection IP 20 protection IP 54 protection IP 54 protection IP 54
Typical power dissipation under following marginal conditions:
• Cabinet size: 600 mm x 600 mm x 2,200 mm
• Difference between the outer and inner temperature of the cabinet is 20 °C (for other temperature
differences refer to the temperature charts of the cabinet manufacturer)
up to 700 W up to 2,700 W (with up to 260 W up to 360 W up to 1,700 W
fine filter up to
1,400 W)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-13
&RQILJXULQJ

 ([DPSOH6HOHFWLQJD&DELQHW

,QWURGXFWLRQ
The sample below clearly shows the maximum permitted ambient air temperature
at a specific power loss for different cabinet designs.

$VVHPEO\
The following device configuration should be installed in a cabinet:
• Central unit, 150 W
• Expansion modules, each with 150 W
• Load power supply under full load, 200 W
This results in a total power loss of 650 W.

3RZHUORVVGLVVLSDWHG
The diagram in the figure below shows guide values for the permitted ambient air
temperature of a cabinet with the dimensions 600 mm x 600 mm x 2,000 mm,
depending on power loss. these values only apply if you maintain the specified
installation and clearance dimensions for racks (rails).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-14 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

Ambient temperature in °C

60

50
1

40

30 2
1
3
20
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

Loss of heat in W

Figure 5-6 Power loss dissipated

&XUYH &DELQHW7\SH
 Closed cabinet with heat exchanger (heat exchanger size 11/6 (920 mm x 460
mm x 111 mm)
 Cabinet with through-ventilation by natural convection
 Closed cabinet with natural convection and forced ventilation by equipment
fans

5HVXOW
From the diagram we can see that the following ambient temperatures are
obtained for a total power loss of 650 W:

Table 5-6 Choice of cabinets

&DELQHWGHVLJQ 0D[LPXPSHUPLWWHGDPELHQW
WHPSHUDWXUH
Closed with natural convection and forced ventilation Operation not possible
(Curve 3)
Open with through-ventilation (Curve 2) approx. 38 °C
Closed with heat exchanger (Curve 1) approx. 45 °C

If you install the S7-300 horizontally, you can use the following types of cabinet:
• open, with closed ventilation
• closed, with heat exchanger

VHHDOVR
Selection and installation of cabinets

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-15
&RQILJXULQJ

 (OHFWULFDO$VVHPEO\3URWHFWLYH0HDVXUHVDQG*URXQGLQJ

 *URXQGLQJFRQFHSWDQGRYHUDOOVWUXFWXUH

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
This section contains information about the overall configuration of an S7-300 on a
grounded incoming supply (TN-S network):
• Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection to VDE 0100 and
VDE 0113
• Load power supplies and load circuits
• Grounding concept

1RWH
An S7-300 can be used in many different ways, so we can only describe the basic
rules for the electrical installation in this document. You must observe at least
these basic rules if you want your S7-300 to operate free of trouble.

'HILQLWLRQ*URXQGHGSRZHUVXSSO\3(1
The neutral is grounded in a grounded power supply system (PEN). A single short-
circuit to ground between a live conductor or a grounded part of the system trips
the protective devices.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-16 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

6SHFLILHGFRPSRQHQWVDQGSURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHV
A number of components and protective measures are prescribed for plant
installations. The type of components and the degree of compulsion pertaining to
the protective measures will depend on the VDE specification applicable to your
particular plant.
The table below shows components and protective measures.

Table 5-7 VDE specifications for the installation of a PLC system

&RPSDUH  9'( 9'(

Disconnecting devices for (1) ... Part 460: ... Part 1:
control systems, sensors Master switch Circuit breaker
and actuators
Short-circuit/overload (2) ... Part 725: ... Part 1:
protection: Single-pole fusing of • In the case of a grounded
In groups for sensors and circuits secondary circuit: Provide
actuators single-pole protection
• Otherwise: Provide all-
pole protection
Load power supply for AC (3) Electrical isolation by Electrical isolation by
load circuits with more than transformer transformer mandatory
five electromagnetic devices recommended

1) This column refers to the numbers in the diagram in the Summary diagram: Grounding
section.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Additional information on protective measures is in the Appendix.

VHHDOVR
General Rules and Regulations for S7-300 Operation

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-17
&RQILJXULQJ

 ,QVWDOOLQJDQ6ZLWK*URXQGHG5HIHUHQFH3RWHQWLDO

,QWURGXFWLRQ
In an S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential occurring interference
current is dissipated to the ground conductor/ to ground. A grounding slide contact
is used for this except with CPU 31xC.

1RWH
Your CPU already is supplied complete with a grounded reference potential,

so if you wish to install an S7-300 with grounded reference potential, then you do
not need to make any changes to your CPU.

*URXQGHGUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORIWKH&38[
The diagram illustrates an S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference
potential.

L+ M 10M <100 nF
M
M 2

3
Figure 5-7 CPU with grounded reference potential (as supplied)

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Grounding slide contact in grounded state
 Ground of internal CPU circuitry
 Rail

1RWH
If you configure an S7-300 with grounded reference potential, you must not pull out
the grounding slide contact.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-18 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

 &RQILJXULQJDQ6ZLWK8QJURXQGHG5HIHUHQFH3RWHQWLDO
1RW&38[&

,QWURGXFWLRQ
If you install an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential, any interference
currents that occur are dissipated via an RC system to the ground conductor/local
ground integrated into the CPU.

1RWH
An S7-300 with a CPU 31xC cannot be configured ungrounded.

$SSOLFDWLRQ
In extended systems, the S7-300 may require configuration with grounded
reference potential due to ground-fault monitoring. This is the case, for example, in
chemical industry and power stations.

8QJURXQGHGUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORI&38DQG'3
The diagram illustrates an S7-300 configuration with floating reference potential

L+ M 10M <100 nF
M
1 2
M

Figure 5-8 Creating an ungrounded reference potential on a CPU

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 If you implement an ungrounded reference potential in your CPU: Use a
screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width and push the grounding slide contact forwards
in the direction of the arrow until it snaps into place.
 Ground of internal CPU circuitry
 Rail

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-19
&RQILJXULQJ

1RWH
If at all possible, set up the ungrounded reference potential before mounting on the
rail.

If you have already installed and wired up the CPU, you may have to detach the
connection to the MPI interface before you pull out the grounding slide contact.

 ,VRODWHGRU1RQ,VRODWHG0RGXOHV"

,VRODWHGPRGXOHV
When isolated modules are installed, the reference potentials of the control circuit
(Minternal) and load circuit (Mexternal) are electrically isolated.

$SSOLFDWLRQ
Use isolated modules for:
• All AC load circuits
• DC load circuits with separate reference potential
Examples:
– DC load circuits whose sensors have different reference potentials (for
example if grounded sensors are located at some considerable distance
from the control system and no equipotential bonding is possible)
– DC load circuits with grounded positive pole (L+) (battery circuits).

,VRODWHGPRGXOHVDQGJURXQGLQJFRQFHSW
You can use isolated modules, regardless of whether or not the control system's
reference potential is grounded.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-20 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH&38[&
The figure below shows a sample configuration of a CPU 31xC with isolated
modules. The connection is automatically generated for the CPU 31xC (1).

PS S7-300 CPU DI DO
U internal
Data
M internal

1 µP
L1 L+
L1
M
N
N
PE

Ground bus
in cabinet

L+ L1

M external N
AC 230 V load
DC 24 V load power supply
power supply

Figure 5-9 Configuration with isolated modules

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-21
&RQILJXULQJ

1RQLVRODWHGPRGXOHV
When non-isolated modules are installed, the reference potentials of the control
circuit (Minternal) and analog circuit (Manalog) are not electrically isolated.

([DPSOH
For operation with an SM 334 AI 4/AO 2 analog I/O module you must connect one
of the grounding terminals Manalog to the CPU's chassis ground.
The figure below shows a sample configuration of an S7-300 CPU with non-
isolated modules.

PS S7-300 CPU 4AI/2AO

U internal
Data
M internal

µP
L1 L+
L1
D D
N M A A
N
PE M Manalog

+ +
2
1 mm

Ground bus V
A
in cabinet
L+

M external

DC 24 V load power supply

Figure 5-10 Configuration with non-isolated modules

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-22 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

 *URXQGLQJ0HDVXUHV

%RQGLQJ
Low-resistance connections to ground reduce the risk of electric shock in case of a
short-circuit or system fault. Low-impedance connections (large surface, large-
surface contact) reduces the effects of interference on the system or the emission
of interference signals. Here, effective shielding of cables and devices is also a
significant contribution.

:DUQLQJ
All protection class 1 devices, and all larger metal parts, must be connected to
protective ground. This is the only way to ensure that the system user is protected
from electrical shock. It also deflects interference which is emitted from external
power supply cables and signal cables to cables connected to I/O devices.

0HDVXUHVIRUSURWHFWLYHJURXQGLQJ
The table below shows an overview of the most important measures for protective
grounding.

Table 5-8 Protective grounding measures

'HYLFH 0HDVXUHV
Cabinet/mounting Connection to central ground (e.g. equipotential bus line) via
structure cables with protective conductor quality
Rack / rail Connection to central ground with cable of minimum cross-
2
section of 10 mm , if the rails are not installed in the cabinet
and not interconnected with larger metallic parts.
Module None
I/O Device Grounding via Schuko plug
Sensors and actuators Grounding in accordance with regulations applying to the
system

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-23
&RQILJXULQJ

5XOH*URXQGWKHFDEOHVKLHOGLQJ
You should always connect both ends of the cable shielding to ground/functional
ground, since this is the only way to achieve good interference suppression in the
higher frequency range.
If you connect only one end of the shielding (that is, at one or the other end of the
cable) to ground, you will merely achieve an attenuation in the lower frequency
range. One-sided shielding connections could be more favorable in situations
• not allowing the installation of an equipotential bonding conductor,
• if analog signals (some mA or µA) are transmitted,
• or if foil shielding is used (static shielding).

1RWH
Potential differences between two grounding points might cause an
equipotential current flow across shielding connected at both ends. In this case
you should install an additional equipotential bonding conductor..

&DXWLRQ
Always avoid the flow of operating current to ground.

'HWDLOVRQFDEOHVKLHOGLQJDQGHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
are found in the Appendix under the same topic.

5XOH*URXQGWKHORDGFLUFXLWV
You should always ground the load circuits. This common reference potential
(earth) ensures proper functioning.
7LSQRWYDOLGIRU&38[&:
If you want to locate a fault to ground, provide your load power supply (Terminal L-
or M) or the isolating transformer with a removable connection to the protective
conductor (see 2YHUYLHZ*URXQGLQJNumber 4).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-24 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

&RQQHFWLQJWKHUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDORIWKHORDGYROWDJH
Numerous output modules require an additional load voltage for switching control
devices.
The table below shows how to connect the load voltage reference potential Mexternal
for the various configuration versions.

Table 5-9 Connection of the load voltage reference potential

,QVWDOODWLRQ 1RQLVRODWHGPRGXOHV ,VRODWHGPRGXOHV 5HPDUNV


grounded Connect Mexternal with M Connect or do not connect -
on the CPU Mexternal to the common
grounding line
ungrounded Connect Mexternal with M Connect or do not connect Ungrounded
on the CPU Mexternal to the common installation with
grounding line CPU31xC not possible

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-25
Configuring

5.8.6 Overview: Grounding

CPU 31xC
The figure below shows you the complete assembly of an S7-300 with CPU 31xC
with a power supply from TN-S mains.
Apart from powering the CPU, the PS 307 also supplies the load current for the
24 VDC modules.
Note: The arrangement displayed does not correspond with the physical
arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.

L1 Low-voltage distribution
L2
L3 e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
N
PE
Cabinet

1
PS CPU SM

Rail

41
µP
L1 L+
M
N

Signal modules

Ground bus in cabinet

3
2
AC
AC
AC 24 to 230 V load circuit for
AC modules
2
AC
DC DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
non-isolated DC modules

2
AC
DC
DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
isolated DC modules

Figure 5-11 Grounding concept for the S7-300 with CPU 31xC

Table 5-10 Connection of the load voltage reference potential

The diagram illustrates under number

(1) Main switch
(2) Short-circuit/overload protection
(3) Load power supply (galvanic isolation)
(4) This connection is automatically generated for the CPU 31xC

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-26 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

$OO&38VH[FHSW&38[&
The figure below shows you the complete assembly of an S7-300 with TN-S mains
supply (does not apply to CPU 31xC).
Apart from powering the CPU, the PS 307 also supplies the load current for the
24 VDC modules.
Note: The arrangement displayed does not correspond with the physical
arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.

L1
L2 Low-voltage distribution
L3 e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
N
PE
Cabinet

1
PS CPU SM

Rail

µP
L1 L+
M
N M
5

Signal modules

Ground bus in cabinet

3
2
AC
AC
AC 24 to 230 V load circuit for AC modules

2
AC
DC DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
4 non-isolated DC modules

2
AC
DC DC 5 to 60 V load circuit for
isolated DC modules

Figure 5-12 Grounding concept for the S7-300 (excluding CPU 31xC)

Table 5-11 Connection of the load voltage reference potential

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Main switch
 Short-circuit/overload protection
 Load power supply (galvanic isolation)
 Disconnectable connection to protective conductor in order to localize ground faults
 Grounding slide contact of the CPU (not CPU 31xC)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-27
&RQILJXULQJ

 6HOHFWLQJWKH/RDG3RZHU6XSSO\

7DVNRIORDGSRZHUVXSSO\
The load power supply feeds the input and output circuits (load circuits), and the
sensors and actuators.

&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIORDGSRZHUVXSSO\XQLWV
You will have to adapt the load power supply unit to your specific application. The
following table compares the various load power supply units and their
characteristics to help you make your choice:

Table 5-12 Characteristics of load power supply units

0DQGDWRU\IRU &KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKHORDG 5HPDUNV

SRZHUVXSSO\
Modules requiring voltage Protective separation These characteristics apply
supplies of ≤ 60 VDC or ≤ 25 to Siemens power supplies
VAC. of the series PS 307 and to
24 VDC load circuits SITOP power (series 6EP1).

Output voltage tolerances: -

20.4 V to 28.8 V
24 VDC load circuits 40.8 V to 57.6 V
48 VDC load circuits 51 V to 72 V
60 VDC load circuits

5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUORDGSRZHUVXSSOLHV
It must provide an extra-low voltage of ≤ 60 VDC and be safely isolated from
mains. Safe isolation from mains can be realized, for example, in accordance with
VDE 0100 Part 410 / HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as functional extra-low voltage
with safe isolation) or VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950 (as safety extra-low voltage
SELV) or VDE 0106 Part 101.

+RZWRGHWHUPLQHORDGFXUUHQW
The required load current is determined by the sum load current of all sensors and
actuators connected to the outputs.
In case of short-circuit the DC outputs are briefly loaded with twice to three times
the rated output current before the clocked electronic short-circuit protection comes
into effect. Thus, you must consider this increased short-circuit current when
selecting your load power supply unit. Uncontrolled load power supplies usually
provide this excess current. With controlled load power supplies - especially for low
output power (up to 20 A) - you must ensure that the supply can handle this excess
current.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-28 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH6ZLWKORDGSRZHUVXSSO\IURP36
The figure below shows the overall S7-300 configuration (load power supply unit
and grounding concept), with TN-S mains supply.
Apart from powering the CPU, the PS 307 also supplies the load current for the
24 VDC modules.

1RWH
The arrangement of supply connections displayed does not correspond with the
physical arrangement; it was merely selected to give you a clear overview.

L1
L2 Low-voltage distribution
L3
N e. g. TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
PE
Cabinet

PS S7-300 CPU SM

Rail

µP
L1 L+
M
N M

Signal modules

Ground bus in cabinet

DC 24 V load circuit for DC modules

Figure 5-13 Example: S7-300 with load power supply from PS 307

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-29
&RQILJXULQJ

 3ODQQLQJ6XEQHWV

 ([WHQGLQJDQG1HWZRUNLQJ6XEQHWV

2YHUYLHZ6XEQHWVZLWK6,0$7,&
SIMATIC offers the following subnets, according to different automation levels
(process, cell, field and actuator/sensor level ):
• Multi-Point Interface (MPI)
• PROFIBUS
• Point-to-point communication (PtP)
• Industrial Ethernet
• Actuator/Sensor Interface (ASI)

0XOWL3RLQW,QWHUIDFH03,
$YDLODELOLW\,QDOOWKH&38VGHVFULEHGLQWKLVGRFXPHQW
MPI is a small subnet with just a few nodes at the field/cell level. It is a multipoint-
capable interface in SIMATIC S7/M7 and C7, intended for operation as PG
interface for networking just a few CPUs or for exchanging small volumes of data
with PGs.
MPI always retains the last configuration of the transmission rate, node number
and highest MPI address, even after memory reset, voltage failure or deletion of
the CPU parameter configuration.

352),%86
$YDLODELOLW\&38VZLWK'3LQWKHLUQDPHKDYHD'3LQWHUIDFH
HJ&38'3
PROFIBUS in the SIMATIC open, multivendor communication system represents
the network at the cell and field level.
PROFIBUS is available in two versions:
1. PROFIBUS DP field bus for fast cyclic data exchange, and PROFIBUS-PA for
the intrinsically safe area.
2. The cell level as PROFIBUS (FDL or PROFIBUS-FMS) for fast data exchange
with communication partners equipped with equal rights.
However, you can also implement PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS-FMS with
communication processors (CP).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-30 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

3RLQWWRSRLQWFRPPXQLFDWLRQ3W3
$YDLODELOLW\&38VZLWK3W3LQWKHLUQDPHKDYHD3W3LQWHUIDFHDVDVHFRQG
LQWHUIDFHHJ&38&3W3
Point-to-Point communication is no subnet in the common sense, because only two
stations are interconnected.
For this type of communication you require PtP communication processors (CP).

,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQXVLQJFRPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRUV&3
Industrial Ethernet in an open multivendor communication system represents the
SIMATIC network at the process and cell level. Industrial Ethernet is suitable for
fast and high-volume data exchange and offers offsite networking options via
gateway.
With S7-300 CPUs, you can implement Industrial Ethernet connections only with
the help of communication processors.

$FWXDWRUVHQVRULQWHUIDFH$6,
,PSOHPHQWDWLRQXVLQJFRPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRUV&3
The ASI, or actuator/sensor interface, represents a subnet system on the lowest
process level for automation systems. It is used especially for networking digital
sensors and actuators. The maximum data volume is 4 bit per slave station.
With S7-300 CPUs, you can connect to an ASI only with the help of communication
processors.

6DPHFRQILJXUDWLRQIRU03,DQG352),%86'3
For your MPI network configuration, we recommend you use the same network
components as in a PROFIBUS DP network configuration. The same configuration
rules apply in this case.

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
on communication can be found in the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,&manual.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-31
&RQILJXULQJ

 %DVLF3ULQFLSOHVRI03,'3DQG3W36XEQHWV

03,352),%86'33W3
These subnets are the most frequently used for S7-300 CPUs, so they are
discussed in detail below.

&RQYHQWLRQ'HYLFH 1RGH
In the following, all networked devices are referred to as nodes.

6HJPHQW
A segment is a bus link between two terminating resistors. A segment can include
up to 32 nodes. It is also limited by the permitted line length, depending on the
transmission rate.

7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH
These maximum transmission rates are possible:
• MPI
– CPU 317-2 DP: 12 Mbps
– All other CPUs: 187.5 Kbps
• PROFIBUS DP: 12 Mbps
• PtP:
– Half duplex: 38.4 Kbps
– Full duplex: 19.2 Kbps

1XPEHURIQRGHV
Maximum possible number of nodes per subnet:

Table 5-13 Nodes on the subnet

3DUDPHWHUV 03, 352),%86'3 3W3

1)
Number 127 126 2
Addresses 0 to 126 0 to 125 -
Remarks Default: 32 addresses of those: -
Reserved are: 1 Master (reserved)
• address 0 for PG 1 PG connection (address 0
• address 1 for OP reserved)
124 slaves or other masters
1)
Note the CPU-specific maximum specifications in the CPU manual.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-32 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
To ensure that all nodes can intercommunicate, you must assign them an address:
• In the MPI network: an “MPI address“
• In the PROFIBUS DP network: a “PROFIBUS DP address“
On the PG you can specify individual MPI/PROFIBUS addresses for each one of
the nodes (on some of the PROFIBUS DP slaves this is also possible per selector
switch).

'HIDXOW03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
The table below shows you the factory setting of the MPI/PROFIBUS DP
addresses and the highest default MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses for the devices.

Table 5-14 MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses

1RGH 'HIDXOW 'HIDXOWKLJKHVW03, 'HIDXOWKLJKHVW

GHYLFH 03,352),%86 DGGUHVV 352),%86'3DGGUHVV
'3DGGUHVV
PG 0 32 126
OP 1 32 126
CPU 2 32 126

5XOHV$VVLJQLQJ03,352),%86'3DGGUHVVHV
Note the following rules before assigning MPI/PROFIBUS addresses:
• All MPI/PROFIBUS addresses in a subnet must be unique.
• The highest MPI/PROFIBUS address must be ≥ of the physical
MPI/PROFIBUS address, and it must be identical for each node. (Exception:
Connecting a PG to multiple nodes; refer to the next Chapter).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-33
&RQILJXULQJ

'LIIHUHQFHVLQWKHFDVHRI03,DGGUHVVHVRI&3V)0VLQDQ6

Table 5-15 MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300

2SWLRQV ([DPSOH
Example: SF
BUSF

CPU CP CP SM
DC5V
FRCE

An S7-300 CPU and 2 CPs in one unit.

RUN

STOP

You have two options for assigning MPI

addresses of CPs/FMs installed in one
unit:

CPU CP CP
)LUVWRSWLRQThe CPU adopts the CP MPI address MPI MPI
MPI addresses you specify in STEP 7. address address.
+x +y
6HFRQGRSWLRQThe CPU automatically MPI address MPI MPI
determines the MPI addresses of the CPs address address
in their configuration as follows: MPI +1 +2
address of CPU; MPI address +1; MPI
address +2.
(Default)
6SHFLDOIHDWXUHV&38'3 This CPU uses only one MPI address,
including the CPs connected.

5HFRPPHQGDWLRQVIRUWKH03,DGGUHVVQ
Reserve MPI address “0“ for a service PG or “1“ for a service OP. You can later
connect them temporarily to the subnet. Also, assign other MPI addresses to
PGs/OPs operating on the MPI subnet.
Recommended MPI address for the CPU in case of replacement or service:
Reserve MPI address “2” for the CPU. This prevents duplication of MPI addresses
after you connect a CPU with default settings to the MPI subnet (for example,
when replacing a CPU). That is, you must assign an MPI address greater than “2”
to CPUs on the MPI subnet.

5HFRPPHQGHG352),%86DGGUHVVQ
Reserve PROFIBUS address “0” for a service PG that you can subsequently
connect briefly to the PROFIBUS subnet if required. Therefore, assign unique
PROFIBUS addresses to PGs integrated in the PROFIBUS subnet.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-34 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

352),%86'3(OHFWULFDOFRQGXFWRURUILEHURSWLFFDEOH"
Use fiber optic cables instead of copper conductors if you want your field bus to
cover greater distances regardless of the transmission rate and be insensitive to
external noise fields.

(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
For information on what to take into account relating to equipotential bonding when
you configure your network, refer to the corresponding chapter in the appendix.

$OVRQRWH
the section referring to communication in the relevant CPU manual.

 ,QWHUIDFHV

03,LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\,QDOOWKH&38VGHVFULEHGLQWKLVGRFXPHQW
The MPI (Multipoint Interface) represents the CPU's interface for PG/OP
connections or for communication in an MPI subnet.
The typical (default) baud rate for all CPUs is 187.5 Kbps. You can also set the
rate to 19.2 Kbps for communication with an S7-200. Other baud rates are only
possible with CPU 317-2 DP (up to 12 Mbps).
The CPU broadcasts its bus parameter configuration via the MPI interface (e.g. the
transmission rate). This allows a PG, for example, to acquire the correct
parameters and automatically connect to an MPI subnet.

1RWH
In RUN mode you may only connect PGs to the MPI subnet.
Other stations (e.g.. OP, TP, ...) should not be connected to the MPI subnet while
the PLC is in run mode. Otherwise, transferred data might be corrupted as a result
interference or global data packages be lost.


S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-35
&RQILJXULQJ

352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\&38W\SHVZLWKWKH'3LQWKHLUQDPH
The PROFIBUS-DP interface is mainly used to connect distributed I/O.
PROFIBUS DP allows you to create large, extended subnets, for example.
The PROFIBUS DP interface can be configured as either master or slave, and
offers a transmission speed of up to 12 Mbps.
The CPU sends its bus parameters (e.g. the baud rate) to the PROFIBUS DP
interface (if it is used as the master). A programming device, for example, can then
automatically retrieve the correct parameters and connect to a PROFIBUS subnet.
In your configuration, you can disable this bus parameter broadcast.
CPU 317-2 DP has two DP interfaces: The first interface is an MPI/DP interface
that you can reconfigure as a PROFIBUS interface in STEP 7.

Table 5-16 Possible interface operating modes for CPU 317-2 DP

03,'3LQWHUIDFH; 352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH;
• MPI • Not assigned
• DP master • DP master
1) 1
• DP slave • DP slave
1)
Excluded: DP slave at both interfaces simultaneously

1RWH
)RUWKH'3LQWHUIDFHLQVODYHPRGH

If you have disabled the Commissioning / Test mode check box in the DP interface
properties in STEP 7, the baud rate you have set will be ignored, and the master's
baud rate will be used automatically, The routing function is then no longer
possible over this interface.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
For information on the new DPV1 functionality, see the section with the same
name in the &38'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO&38[&DQG&38[.

3W3LQWHUIDFH
$YDLODELOLW\&38W\SHVZLWKWKHLGHQWLILHU3W3
You can use the PtP (Point to Point) interface on your CPU to connect external
devices such as a barcode reader, printer, etc. to a serial port. Baud rates of up to
19.2 Kbps for full duplex (RS 422) and up to 38.4 Kbps for half duplex (RS 485) are
possible.
The following PtP communication drivers are installed in the CPUs:
• ASCII driver
• 3964(R) Protocol
• RK 512 (only CPU 314C-2 PtP)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-36 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

:KLFKGHYLFHVFDQ,FRQQHFWWRZKLFKLQWHUIDFH"

Table 5-17 The following devices may be connected

03, 352),%86'3 3W3

• PG/PC • PG/PC • Devices equipped with a
• OP/TP • OP/TP serial port, e.g. barcode
readers, printers, etc.
• S7-300/400 with MPI • DP slaves
interface • DP master
• S7-200 • Actuators/Sensors
(19.2 Kbps only)
• S7-300/400 with
PROFIBUS-DP
interface

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
Further information on specific connections can be found in the &RPPXQLFDWLRQ
ZLWK6,0$7,& manual.
Details on PtP communication is found in the 7HFKQRORJLFDO)XQFWLRQV Manual.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-37
&RQILJXULQJ

 1HWZRUN&RPSRQHQWV

352),%86EXVFDEOH
For PROFIBUS DP or MPI networking we offer you the following bus cables for
diverse fields of application:

Table 5-18 Available bus cables

%XVFDEOH 2UGHU1R
PROFIBUS cable 6XV1 830-0AH10
PROFIBUS cable, halogen-free 6XV1 830-0CH10
PROFIBUS underground cable 6XV1 830-3AH10
PROFIBUS trailing cable 6XV1 830-3BH10
PROFIBUS cable with PUR sheath for 6XV1 830-0DH10
environments subject to chemical and
mechanical stress
PROFIBUS bus cable with PE sheath for 6XV1 830-0BH10
the food and beverages industry
PROFIBUS bus cable for festooning 6XV1 830-3CH10

3URSHUWLHVRI352),%86FDEOHV
The PROFIBUS cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable with copper conductors. It is
used for line transmission in accordance with US Standard EIA RS485.
The table below lists the characteristics of these bus cables.

Table 5-19 Characteristics of the bus cables for PROFIBUS

&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRIWKHEXVFDEOHVIRU 9DOXHV
352),%863URSHUWLHV
Impedance level approx. 135 Ω to 160 Ω (f = 3 MHz to 20 MHz)
Loop resistance ≤ 115 Ω/km
Effective capacitance 30 nF/km
Attenuation 0.9 dB/100 m (f = 200 kHz)
2 2
permitted conductor cross-sections 0.3 mm to 0.5 mm
permitted cable diameter 8 mm ± 0.5 mm

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-38 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

:LULQJEXVFDEOHV
When wiring PROFIBUS cables, you must not
• twist,
• stretch
• or compress them.
When wiring indoor bus cables, also maintain the following marginal conditions
(dA = outer cable diameter):

Table 5-20 Marginal conditions for wiring interior bus cables

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV &RQGLWLRQ
Bending radius (one-off) ≥ 80 mm (10 x dA)
Bending radius (multiple times) ≥ 160 mm (20 x dA)
permitted temperature range during installation -5 °C to +50 °C
Shelf and stationary operating temperature range -30 °C to +65 °C

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
If you want to use fiber optic cable cables for PROFIBUS, you can find further
information on this topic in the SIMATIC NET, PROFIBUS Networks Manual.

56EXVFRQQHFWRU

Table 5-21 Bus connector

7\SH 2UGHU1R
RS485 bus connector, up to 12 Mbps,
with 90° cable exit,
without PG interface, 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
with PG interface 6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0
Fast Connect RS485 bus connector, up to 12 Mbps,
with 90° cable exit, with insulation displacement technology
, without PG interface, 6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0
with PG interface 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0
RS485 bus connector up to 12 Mbps
with 35° cable exit (not for CPU 31xC, 312, 314, and 315-2
DP
without PG interface 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0
with PG interface 6ES7 972-0BB40-0XA0

$SSOLFDWLRQ
You require these bus connectors to connect the PROFIBUS cable to an MPI or
PROFIBUS-DP interface
You do QRW require a bus connector for:
• DP slaves with degree of protection IP 65 (e.g. ET 200C)
• RS485 repeater.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-39
&RQILJXULQJ

56UHSHDWHU

Table 5-22 RS 485 repeater

7\SH 2UGHU1R
RS485 repeater 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0

3XUSRVH
An RS485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus
segments.
You require this RS485 Repeater in the following situations:
• for operation with more than 32 network nodes
• when interconnecting a grounded and an ungrounded segment
• when exceeding the maximum line length in a segment

7KHPD[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKVIRU565HSHDWHUV
... can be found in the Chapter &DEOHOHQJWKV.

/RQJHUFDEOHOHQJWKV
If you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you
must use RS485 repeaters. The maximum cable length possible between two
RS485 repeaters corresponds to the cable length of a segment (see the following
Chapter). Please note that these maximum cable lengths only apply if no other
node is interconnected between the two RS485 repeaters. You can connect up to
nine RS485 repeaters in series.
Please note that you have to add the RS485 repeater when you determine the
number of nodes in your subnet, even if it is not assigned its own MPI/PROFIBUS
address.

7HFKQLFDOGDWDDQGLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVDUHIRXQG
... in the RS485 Repeater product information.

3*SDWFKFRUG

Table 5-23 PG patch cord

7\SH 2UGHU1R
PG patch cord 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-40 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

6WXEFDEOHV
If bus nodes are connected to a bus segment via stub cables (e.g. PG via a normal
PG cable), then you must consider the maximum possible length of the stub cable.
You can use a PROFIBUS bus cable with bus connector as the stub cable for up to
3 Mbps.
Use the patch cord to connect the PG or PC when operating above 3 Mbps. In your
bus configuration you can use multiple PG patch cords with this order no. Do not
use other types of stub cable.

7KHPD[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKVIRU3*SDWFKFRUGV
... can be found in the Chapter &DEOHOHQJWKV.

 &DEOH/HQJWK

03,VXEQHWVHJPHQW
You can implement cable lengths of up to 50 m in an MPI subnet segment. This
50 m applies from the first node to the last node in the segment.

Table 5-24 Permitted cable lengths in an MPI subnet segment

7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 6&38VQRQLVRODWHG &38'3

03,LQWHUIDFHZLWKRXW&38
'3
19.2 kbps 50 m 1,000 m
187.5 kbps
1.5 Mbps - M 200
3.0 Mbps M 100
6.0 Mbps
12.0 Mbps

6HJPHQWLQWKH352),%86VXEQHW
The cable length in a segment of a PROFIBUS subnet depends on the
transmission rate.

Table 5-25 Permitted cable lengths in a PROFIBUS subnet segment

7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 0D[LPXPFDEOHOHQJWKLQDVHJPHQW
9.6 kbps to 187.5 kbps 1,000 m
500 kbps M 400
1.5 Mbps M 200
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps M 100

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-41
&RQILJXULQJ

/RQJHUFDEOHOHQJWKV
If you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you
must use RS485 repeaters. Information on this topic can be found in the
RS485 repeater product information.

/HQJWKRIWKHVWXEFDEOHV
If bus nodes are connected to a bus segment via stub cables (e.g. PG via a normal
PG cable), then you must consider the maximum possible length of the stub cable.
The following table lists the maximum permitted lengths of stub cables per
segment:

Table 5-26 Stub cable lengths per segment

7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH 0D[OHQJWKRIVWXE 1XPEHURIQRGHVZLWKVWXEFDEOHOHQJWK

FDEOHVSHUVHJPHQW RI
PRUP 0
9.6 kbps to 93.75 M 96 32 32
kbps
187.5 kbps M 75 32 25
500 kbps M 30 20 10
1.5 Mbps M 10 6 3
1) 1) 1)
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps
1)
At 3 Mbps and higher, use the PG patch cord (Order No. 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0) to
connect the PG or PC. You can use multiple PG patch cords of this number in an
installation. Do not use any other type of stub cable.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-42 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

 6DPSOH1HWZRUNV

([DPSOH,QVWDOOLQJDQ03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you the block diagram of an MPI subnet.

S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300

SF
BUSF
2 PG 3
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

PS CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU CP
2
OP 27
MPI addr. 2 MPI addr. 1 MPI addr. 3 MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 MPI addr. 6 MPI addr. 7
PROFIBUS 4
1

3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300

3
PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU FM

OP 27 OP 27
MPI addr. 13 MPI addr. 12 MPI addr. 11 MPI addr. 10 MPI addr. 8 MPI addr. 9
1

MPI addr. 0
PG

Figure 5-14 Example of an MPI subnet

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Terminating resistor inserted
 S7-300 and OP 27 have subsequently been connected to the MPI subnet using their MPI default
address.
 CPU 31xC, 312, 314, 315-2 DP
You can also assign MPI addresses of CPs/FMs for these CPUs.
CPU 317-2 DP
CPs and FMs do not have their own MPI address in this CPU.
 In addition to the MPI address, the CP also has a PROFIBUS address (7 in this case).
 Connected via a stub cable using the default MPI address for commissioning/maintenance only

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-43
&RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH0D[LPXPGLVWDQFHVLQWKH03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you:
• a possible MPI Subnet configuration
• maximum distances possible in an MPI subnet
• the principle of “Line extension“ using RS485 repeaters

3 S7-300 3 S7-300 3 S7-300 1

PG
PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU RS 485-
OP 27 Repeater
MPI addr. 3 MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 MPI addr. 6 MPI addr. 7
1 1

PG 2

MPI addr. 0 max. 1000 m

max. 50 m

3 S7-300 3 S7-300 1

PS CPU
CPU PS CPU
CPU RS 485-
OP 27 OP 27 Repeater
MPI addr. 11 MPI addr. 10 MPI addr. 9 MPI addr. 8
1 1

max. 50 m

Figure 5-15 Example: Maximum distances in the MPI subnet

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Terminating resistor inserted
 PG connected by means of a stub cable for maintenance purposes

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-44 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH,QVWDOOLQJD352),%86VXEQHW
The figure below shows you the block diagram of a PROFIBUS subnet.

3 S7-300 3 3 S7-300
CPU
31x-2 DP
PS CPU PS ET
CPU200M PS ET
CPU200M PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
DP-CPU PS ET
CPU200M

MASTER S5-95U
1
MPI addr. 3 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
addr. 2 addr. 3 addr. 4 addr. 5 addr. 6 addr. 7

MPI addr. 0

PG 2

PS ET
CPU200M CPU
ET 200B ET 200B CPU
ET 200B CPU
ET 200B

1
PROFIBUS
1 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS PROFIBUS
addr. 12 addr. 11 addr. 10 addr. 9 addr. 8

Figure 5-16 Example of a PROFIBUS subnet

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Terminating resistor inserted
 PG connected by means of a stub cable for maintenance purposes

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-45
&RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH&38&'3DV03,DQG352),%86QRGH
The figure below shows you an assembly with a CPU 314C-2 DP integrated in an
MPI subnet and also operated as DP master in a PROFIBUS subnet.

S7-300
PG
S5-95U
CPU
PS CPU
1 DP addr. 7

MPI addr. 0 1
MPI addr. 2
2
S5-95U
DP addr. 6
S7-300

PS CPU
S5-95U
MPI addr. 3 DP addr. 5
S7-300 CPU
with DP interface
S7-300 as DP master
1

CPU
PS CPU CPU
PS DP-CPU RS 485-
OP 27 ET200M ET200M Repeater
MPI addr. 4 MPI addr. 5 1 DP addr. 2 DP addr. 3 DP addr. 4

S7-300 MPI addr. 6

CPU
PS CPU ET200M ET200M
OP 27 9
DP addr. 9 DP addr. 8
1 MPI addr. 8 MPI addr. 7

ET200B ET200B
1
DP addr. 10 DP addr. 11

MPI subnet PROFIBUS subnet

Figure 5-17 Example: CPU 314C-2 DP as MPI and PROFIBUS nodes

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Terminating resistor inserted
 PG connected via a stub cable for maintenance or commissioning purposes

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-46 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

([DPSOH3*DFFHVVDFURVVQHWZRUNERXQGDULHVURXWLQJ
With a programming device you can access all modules across network
boundaries.
Requirements
• You are using STEP 7 Version 5.0 or higher.
Note: for STEP 7 requirements on utilized CPUs, refer to technical
specifications.
• You must assign the PG/PC to a network in your STEP 7 project (SIMATIC
Manager, assigning a PG/PC).
• The network boundaries must be bridged by modules with routing capability.
• After having configured all networks in NETPRO, you have initiated a new
compilation for all stations and downloaded the configuration to every module
capable of routing. This also applies to all changes made in the network.
Thus, every router knows all possible paths to a target station.

PG/PC 3

S7-400 S7-400

PS CPU416
CPU PS CPU
CPU417

MPI (2)
MPI (1) S7-300 S7-300

CPU PS CPU
CPU
PS CPU
31x-2 DP

PG/PC 1

PROFIBUS-DP
ET200
CPU

PG/PC 2

Figure 5-18 Example of PG access across network boundaries (routing)

1RWH
)RU&38VZLWK'3LQWHUIDFHRQO\

If these CPUs are operated as I-slaves and you want to use the routing function,
you must activate the Commissioning/Test Mode functionality in the Properties -
DP Interface for DP Slave in STEP 7.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-47
&RQILJXULQJ

,QIRUPDWLRQRQURXWLQJFDQEHIRXQGLQWKH
• &38'DWD5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOfor your CPU
• In the &RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWK6,0$7,& manual.

([DPSOH7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRULQWKH03,VXEQHW
The figure below shows you an example of an MPI subnet and where to install the
terminating resistor.
The figure below illustrates where the terminating resistors must be connected in
an MPI subnet. In this example, the programming device is connected via a stub
cable during commissioning or maintenance only.

S7-300 PG

PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
CPU

S7-300 S7-300 1 S7-300

RS 485-
PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M Repeater PSPSCPU
CPU
ET 200 M
OP 27 OP 27

1 1

2
PG

Installing Figure 5-19 the terminating resistors in an MPI subnet

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Terminating resistor inserted
 PG connected by means of a stub cable for maintenance purposes

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-48 A5E00105492-03
 &RQILJXULQJ

:DUQLQJ
Disturbance of data traffic might occur on the bus.

A bus segment must always be terminated at both ends with the terminating
resistor. This, for example, is not the case if the last slave with bus connector is off
power.

Since the bus connector draws its power from the station, the terminating resistor
has no effect.
Please make sure that power is always supplied to stations on which the
terminating resistor is active.
As an alternative, you can also use the PROFIBUS Terminator as active bus
termination.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5-49
&RQILJXULQJ

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
5-50 A5E00105492-03


,QVWDOODWLRQ

 ,QVWDOOLQJDQ6

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we shall explain the steps required for the mechanical assembly of an S7-300.

1RWH
Note the installation guidelines and notes on safety in this manual when mounting,
commissioning and operating S7-300 systems.

2SHQFRPSRQHQWV
S7-300 modules are "Open Components" according to IEC 61131-2 and
EU directive 73/23/EEC (Low-Voltage directive), and to UL/CSA Approval an "open
type".
In order to conform with specifications on safe operation relating to mechanical
strength, inflammability, stability and touch-protection, the following alternative
installation modes are prescribed:
• Installation in a suitable cubicle
• Installation in a suitable cabinet
• Installation in an appropriately equipped and closed operating area
Access to these areas must only be possible with a key or tool. Only trained or
authorized personnel is allowed access to these cubicles, cabinets or electrical
operating rooms.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 6-1
,QVWDOODWLRQ

$FFHVVRULHVLQFOXGHG
Installation accessories are included with the module package. The appendix
contains a list of accessories and spare parts together with the corresponding
order numbers.

Table 6-1 Module accessories

0RGXOH $FFHVVRULHVLQFOXGHG 'HVFULSWLRQ

CPU 1 x Slot number label For assigning slot numbers
Inscription labels for the MPI address and
Firmware Version (all CPUs)
for labeling of integrated
inputs and outputs (CPU
31xC only)
Tip: Templates for labeling
strips are available on the
Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/cs
info under article ID
11978022.
Signal module (SM) 1 bus connector For electrical interconnection
Function Module (FM) of modules
1 labeling strip for labeling module I/O
Tip: Templates for labeling
strips are available on the
Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/cs
info under article ID 406745.
Communication module (CP) 1 bus connector For electrical interconnection
of modules
1 inscription label for labeling the connection to
(only CP 342-2) the PLC interface
Tip: Templates for labeling
strips are available on the
Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/cs
info under article ID 406745.
Interface module (IM) 1 x Slot number label (only For assigning slot numbers
IM 361 and IM 365) on racks 1 to 3

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6-2 A5E00105492-03
 ,QVWDOODWLRQ

7RROVDQGPDWHULDOUHTXLUHG
For your S7-300 installation you require the tools and materials listed in the table
below.

Table 6-2 Installation tools and materials

<RXUHTXLUH IRU
cutting the 2 m rail to length Standard tool
scribing and drilling holes on the 2 m rail Standard tool, 6.5 mm diameter drill bit
screw-mounting the rail wrench or screwdriver, matching the
selected fixing screws
diverse M6 screws (length depends on the
place of installation) with nuts and spring
lock washers
screw-fastening the modules on the rail screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width
(cylindrical design)
pulling out the grounding slide contact in the screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade width
floating state (cylindrical design)

 ,QVWDOOLQJWKHUDLO

,QWURGXFWLRQ
rails are available in two versions:
• Ready-to-use, in four standard lengths (with 4 holes for fixing screws and
1 ground conductor bolt)
• Meter rail
This may be shortened to any length if unusual size attachments are required. It
has no holes for fixing screws and no ground conductor screw.

5HTXLUHPHQW
You have prepared the 2 m rail for installation.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 6-3
,QVWDOODWLRQ

3UHSDULQJWKHPUDLOIRULQVWDOODWLRQ
1. Cut the 2 m rail to the required length.
2. Mark out:
– four bores for the fixing screws (for dimensions refer to "Dimensions for
fixing holes")
– one hole for the protective conductor bolt.
3. If the length of your rail exceeds 830 mm, you must stabilize it by providing
additional holes for fixing it with more screws.
Mark out these holes along the groove in the middle section of the rail (see the
Figure below). The pitch should be approx. 500 mm.
+0.2
4. Drill the marked holes to a diameter of 6.5 mm for M6 screws.
5. Attach an M6 screw for fixing the ground conductor.

2 3

1
5

Figure 6-1 Holes for mounting the 2 m rail

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Hole for ground conductor screw
 Groove for drilling additional holes for mounting screws
 Hole for mounting screw
 Additional hole for mounting screw
 Hole for mounting screw

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6-4 A5E00105492-03
 ,QVWDOODWLRQ

'LPHQVLRQRIWKHPRXQWLQJKROHV
The mounting hole dimensions for the rail are shown in the table below.

Table 6-3 Mounting holes for rails

³6WDQGDUG´UDLO PUDLO

32.5
32,5 mm
mm
32.5 mm

57.2 mm
57,2 mm
57.2 mm
ca. ca.
500 mm 500 mm

15 mm _ _ 15 mm _ _

a b

Length of rail Dimension a Dimension b –

160 mm 10 mm 140 mm
482.6 mm 8.3 mm 466 mm
530 mm 15 mm 500 mm
830 mm 15 mm 800 mm

)L[LQJVFUHZV
You can use the following type of screw to mount the rails:

)RU 7\SHRIVFUHZ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Lateral fixing screws Cylindrical head screw M6 to Choose a suitable screw
ISO 1207/ISO 1580 length for your assembly.
(DIN 84/DIN 85) You also need size 6.4
M6 hexagonal head screw to washers to ISO 7092
ISO 4017 (DIN 4017) (DIN 433)
additional fixing screws Cylindrical head screw M6 to
(only 2 m rail) ISO 1207/ISO 1580
(DIN 84/DIN 85)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 6-5
,QVWDOODWLRQ

,QVWDOOLQJWKHUDLO
1. When you mount the rails, allow sufficient space for mounting modules and heat
elimination (at least 40 mm above and below the modules. See the figure
below).
2. Mark up the mounting holes on the mounting surface. Drill the holes to a
+0,2
diameter of 6.5 mm.
3. Screw on the rail (M6 screws).

1RWH
Take care to create a low-impedance connection between the rail and a
mounting surface which is a grounded metal plate or equipment mounting plate.
In the case of varnished or anodized metals, for instance, use a suitable
contacting agent or contact washers.

40 mm
SIEMENS

20 20
mm mm
40 mm

Figure 6-2 Free space required for an S7-300 installation

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6-6 A5E00105492-03
 ,QVWDOODWLRQ

 ,QVWDOOLQJ0RGXOHVRQWKH5DLO

5HTXLUHPHQWIRULQVWDOOLQJWKHPRGXOH
• Configuration of the automation system is complete.
• The rail is installed.

2UGHURIWKHPRGXOHV
Snap the modules onto the rail, starting at the left and in the following order:
1. Power supply module
2. CPU
3. signal modules, function modules, communication modules, interface modules

1RWH
If you install SM 331 analog input modules, please check EHIRUH installation
whether you have to reposition the measuring range submodules at the side of the
module. See Chapter 4 on analog modules in the 0RGXOH'DWD Reference Manual.

1RWH
If you want to create the S7-300 with a floating reference potential, you must
establish this state on the CPU, ideally before you attach it to the rail. The section
entitled &UHDWLQJDQ6ZLWKIORDWLQJUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO contains the
necessary instructions.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 6-7
,QVWDOODWLRQ

,QVWDOODWLRQVWHSV

The steps for installing the modules are described below.

1. Plug the bus connectors into the CPU and

signal/function/communication/interface
modules.
One bus connector is included per
module, but not for the CPU.
• Always start at the CPU when you plug CPU
in the bus connectors. Here, take the
bus connector of the "last" module in
the row.
• Insert the bus connectors into the
other modules.
The "last" module is not equipped with
a bus connector.
2. Lower each module onto the rail in the 1
intended order , slide each module in 2
turn to the module on the left ), and pivot
the module down into place .
CPU

3
3. Attach the modules with screws until
hand-tight.

CPU

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6-8 A5E00105492-03
 ,QVWDOODWLRQ

 /DEHOWKHPRGXOHV

$VVLJQLQJVORWQXPEHUV
After installation, you should assign a slot number to each module. This makes it
easier to assign the modules in the configuration table in 67(3. The table below
shows the slot number assignment.

Table 6-4 Slot numbers for S7 modules

6ORWQXPEHU 0RGXOH 5HPDUNV

1 Power supply (PS) –
2 CPU –
3 Interface module (IM) To the right of the CPU
4 1st signal module To the right of the CPU or IM
5 2nd signal module –
6 3rd signal module –
7 4th signal module –
8 5th signal module –
9 6th signal module –
10 7th signal module –
11 8th signal module –

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 6-9
,QVWDOODWLRQ

,QVHUWLQJVORWQXPEHUV
1. Hold the corresponding slot number in front of the relevant module.
2. Insert the pin into the opening on the module (1).
3. Press the slot number into the module (2). The slot number breaks off from the
wheel.
The figure below illustrates this procedure. The slot number labels are included
with the CPU.

PS CP
U

Figure 6-3 Inserting slot numbers in modules

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6-10 A5E00105492-03


:LULQJ

 :LULQJ

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we shall explain the procedures for wiring an S7-300.

$FFHVVRULHVUHTXLUHG
To wire the S7-300, you require the accessories listed in the table below.

Table 7-1 Wiring accessories

$FFHVVRULHV 'HVFULSWLRQ
Front connector for the connection of system
sensors/actuators to the S7-300
Labeling strips for labeling the module I/O
Shielding contact element, shielding for connecting cable shielding
terminals (matching the shielding diameter)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-1
:LULQJ

7RROVDQGPDWHULDOUHTXLUHG
To wire the S7-300, you require the tools and materials listed in the table below.

:LULQJWRROVDQGPDWHULDOV<RXUHTXLUH IRU
connecting the protective conductor to the Wrench (size 10)
rail Protective conductor cable (cross-
2
section ≥ 10 mm ) with M6 cable lug
M6 nut, washer, spring lock washer
Adjusting the power supply module to mains Screwdriver with a blade width of 4.5 mm
voltage
Wiring the power supply module and the Screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm,
CPU side-cutter, wire stripping tool
Flexible cable, e.g. sheathed flexible cable
2
3 x 1.5 mm
If required, wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
Wiring the front connector Screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm,
side-cutter, wire stripping tool
2 2
Flexible cable 0.25 mm to 0.75/1.5 mm
If required, shielded cables
If required, wire end ferrules to DIN 46228

%ULHIRYHUYLHZRIWKHSRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOHDQG&38

Table 7-2 Conditions for connecting the PS and CPU

&RQQHFWDEOHFDEOHV WR36DQG&38
solid conductors No
flexible conductors
2 2
• Without wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 2.5 mm
2 2
• With wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm
2
Number of conductors per terminal 1 conductor, or 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm
(total) in a common wire end ferrule
Diameter of the conductor insulation max. 3.8 mm
Stripped length 11 mm
Wire end ferrules to DIN 46228
• Without insulating collar Version A, 10 mm to 12 mm length
• With insulating collar Version E, up to 12 mm length

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-2 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

%ULHIRYHUYLHZRIIURQWFRQQHFWRUV

Table 7-3 Wiring conditions for front connectors

&RQQHFWDEOHFDEOHV )URQWFRQQHFWRU
20-pin 40-pin
solid conductors No No
flexible conductors
2 2 2 2
• Without wire end 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm 0.25 mm to 0.75 mm
ferrule 2
0.25 mm to 1.5 mm
2 2
0.25 mm to 0.75 mm
2

• With wire end ferrule • Potential supply: 1.5 mm

2

Number of conductors per 1 conductor, or 2 conductors 1 conductor, or 2 conductors

2 2
terminal up to 1.5 mm (total) in a up to 0.75 mm (total) in a
common wire end ferrule common wire end ferrule
Diameter of the conductor max. 3.1 mm • max. 2.0 mm for
insulation 40 conductors
• max. 3.1 mm for 20
conductors
Stripped length 6 mm 6 mm
Wire end ferrules to DIN
46228
• Without insulating Version A, 5 mm to 7 mm Version A, 5 mm to 7 mm
collar length length
• With insulating collar Version E, up to 6 mm long Version E, up to 6 mm long

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-3
:LULQJ

 &RQQHFWLQJWKH3URWHFWLYH&RQGXFWRUWRWKH5DLO

5HTXLUHPHQW
The rail is fixed to the mounting surface.

&RQQHFWLQJWKHSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
1. Connect the protective conductor to the rail,
using the M6 protective conductor bolt.
2
Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor: 10 mm .
The figure below shows how the protective conductor must be bonded to the rail.

Figure 7-1 connecting the protective conductor to the rail

1RWH
Always ensure a low-impedance connection of the protective conductor. You can
achieve this by bonding a cable with low impedance and as short as possible to a
large contact surface.
For example, if the S7-300 is mounted on a hinged frame you must use a flexible
ground strap.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-4 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

 $GMXVWLQJWKH3RZHU6XSSO\0RGXOHWRWKH0DLQV9ROWDJH

,QWURGXFWLRQ
You can operate the S7-300 power supply on 120 VAC or on 230 VAC. Factory
setting for PS 307 is always 230 VAC.

6HWWLQJWKHPDLQVYROWDJHVHOHFWRUVZLWFK
Check to see whether the selector switch is set to the correct mains voltage.
You can change the selector switch setting as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap with a screwdriver.
2. Set the selector switch to the available line voltage.
3. Replace the cover.

PS CPU

Figure 7-2 Setting the mains voltage selector switch for the PS 307

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Remove protective cap with screwdriver.
 Set selector switch to mains voltage

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-5
:LULQJ

 :LULQJWKH3RZHU6XSSO\0RGXOHDQGWKH&38

5HTXLUHPHQW
The modules are mounted on the rail.

36DQG&38ZLULQJ

1RWH
The PS 307 power supply module is equipped with two additional DC 24 V
connections (L+ and M) for the supply of I/O modules.

1RWH
The power supply connection of your CPU can be inserted and removed.

:DUQLQJ
You may come into contact with live wires if the power supply module and any
additional load power supply units are connected to the mains.

You should therefore disconnect the S7-300 from the power supply before starting
the wiring. Only use ferrules with insulating collars to press-fit onto the ends of the
cables. Once you have wired the modules, close all the front panels. You can then
switch on the S7-300 again.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-6 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

1. Open the front panel to the PS 307 power supply module and CPU.
2. Open the strain relief on the PS 307.
3. Strip the power cable to a length of 11 mm and connect it to L1, N and to the
ground conductor terminal of the PS 307.
4. Screw-tighten the strain relief again.
5. Now, wire the power supply and CPU.
The power supply connection of the CPUs can be inserted and removed.
Strip the connecting cables for the CPU power supply to a length of 11 mm.
Connect the lower terminals M and L+ on the PS 307 to terminals M and L+ on
the CPU.

:DUQLQJ
Reversing the polarity of the M and L+ terminals trips the internal fuse on your
CPU. Always connect the M terminal of the power supply and CPU and the L+
terminal of the power supply and CPU to one another.

6. Close the front panel.

The figure below illustrates the procedures described above.

DC 24 V

230V

L1
N

L+
M
L+
M L+
M

1
3
230 V/120 V
2

Figure 7-3 Wiring the power supply module and the CPU

.H\WRQXPEHUVLQWKHILJXUH
 Strain relief of the power supply
 Connection cables between the power supply and CPU
 Removable power supply connection

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-7
:LULQJ

1RWH
The PS 307 power supply module is equipped with two additional DC 24 V
connections (L+ and M) for the supply of I/O modules.

 :LULQJ)URQW&RQQHFWRUV

,QWURGXFWLRQ
The front connector is used to connect the sensors and actuators of your system to
the S7-300 PLC. Wire the sensors and actuators to this front connector and then
plug it into the module.

)URQWFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQV
Front connectors come in 20-pin and 40-pin versions, each with screw contacts or
spring terminals. 40-pin front connectors are required for CPUs 31xC and
32-channel signal modules.
You must use the following front connectors, depending on the module:

Table 7-4 Assignment of front connectors to modules

0RGXOH )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWK )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWK

VFUHZWHUPLQDOV2UGHU VSULQJWHUPLQDOV2UGHU
1R 1R
Signal modules 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0
(not 32-channel),
Function modules,
Communication module
CP 342-2
Signal modules 6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0
(32-channel) and
CPU 31xC

7HUPLQDWLRQZLWKVSULQJWHUPLQDOV
To terminate a conductor in a front connector with spring terminals, simply insert
the screwdriver vertically into the opening with the red opening mechanism, insert
the wire into the terminal and remove the screwdriver.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-8 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

:DUQLQJ
You can damage the spring-based opening mechanism of the front connector if the
screwdriver slips sideways or if you insert the wrong size of screwdriver. Always
slide a suitable screwdriver vertically into the desired opening until it reaches the
stop. This will ensure that the spring terminal is fully open.

7LS
There is a separate opening for test probes up to 2 mm in diameter to the left of the
opening for the screwdriver.

5HTXLUHPHQW
The modules (SM, FM, CP 342-2) are mounted on the rail.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-9
:LULQJ

3UHSDULQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRUDQGWKHFDEOHV

:DUQLQJ
You may come into contact with live wires if the power supply module and any
additional load power supply units are connected to the mains.

You should therefore disconnect the S7-300 from the power supply before starting
the wiring. Once you have wired the modules, close all the front panels. You can
then switch on the S7-300 again.

1. Switch off the power supply.

2. Open the front panel.
3. Move the front connector into wiring position.
Slide the front connector into the signal module until it latches. The front
connector still protrudes from the module in this position.
Advantage of the wiring position: Easy wiring.
In this wiring position the front connector does not contact the module.
4. Strip the leads to a length of 6 mm.
5. Crimp on the cable end sleeves, e.g. for terminating 2 conductors on 1 terminal.

2
PS CPU

32

Figure 7-4 Move the front connector into wiring position

Table 7-5 Assignment of front connectors to modules

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Switched-off power supply (PS)
 Opened module
 Front connector in wiring position

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-10 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

:LULQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRU

Table 7-6 Wiring the front connector

6WHS SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU

1. Thread the accompanying strain relief for -
the cable line into the front connector.
2. Do you want to exit the cables at the bottom of the module?
,I\HV
Starting at terminal 20, work your way down Starting at terminal 40 or 20, wire the connector,
to terminal 1. working in alternating passes from terminals 39,
19, 38, 18 etc. until you have reached
terminals 21 and 1.
,IQRW
Starting at terminal 1, work your way up to Starting at terminal 1 or 21, wire the connector,
terminal 20. working in alternating passes from terminals 2,
22, 3, 23 etc. until you have reached
terminals 20 and 40.
3. )URQWFRQQHFWRUVZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
Screw-tighten unused terminals also.
4. - Place the accompanying strain relief around the
cable line and the front connector.
5. Pull the strain relief for the cable line tight. Push in the strain relief to the left to improve
utilization of the available cable space.
-

1
2

12
1
1

13 14

The work step numbers are shown in the figure above

 Thread the strain relief.  to  Wire the terminals.
 Wire the terminals.  Tighten the strain relief.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-11
:LULQJ

 ,QVHUWLQJ)URQW&RQQHFWRUVLQWR0RGXOHV

5HTXLUHPHQW
The front connectors are completely wired.

,QVHUWLQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRU

,QVHUWLQ ZLWKSLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU ZLWKSLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU
JWKH
IURQW
FRQQHFW
RU6WHS
1. Push in the unlocking mechanism on top Tighten the mounting screw in the
of the module. center of the connector.
Keeping the locking mechanism
pressed, insert the front connector into This pulls the front connector
the module. completely into contact with the
Provided the front connector is seated module.
correctly in the module, the unlocking
mechanism automatically returns to
initial position when you release it.
1RWH
When you insert the front connector into the module, an encoding mechanism
engages in the front connector, thus ensuring that the connector can only be
inserted in modules of the same type.
2. Close the front panel. Close the front panel.

1
1
2
PS C
3
PU
PS C
PU 1
2

The work step numbers are shown in the figure above

 Keep unlocking mechanism pressed.  Tighten mounting screw.
 Insert front connector.  You can now close the front panel
 Then close the front door.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-12 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

 /DEHOLQJWKH0RGXOH,2

,QWURGXFWLRQ
The labeling strips are used to document the assignment between inputs/outputs of
the modules and the sensors/actuators of your plant.
You must use the labeling strips, depending on the module:

Table 7-7 Assigning the labeling strips to modules

0RGXOH /DEHOLQJVWULS
2UGHU1R
Signal modules (not 32-channel), 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0
Function modules,
Communication module CP 342-2
Signal modules (32-channel) 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0

/DEHOLQJDQGLQVHUWLQJODEHOLQJVWULSV
1. Label the strips with the addresses of the sensors/actuators.
2. Slide the labeled strips into the front panel.

PS CPU

Figure 7-5 Slide the labeled strips into the front panel

7LS
Templates for labeling strips are available on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo under article ID 11978022.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-13
:LULQJ

 &RQQHFWLQJ6KLHOGHG&DEOHVWRWKH6KLHOGLQJ&RQWDFW(OHPHQW

$SSOLFDWLRQ
Using the shielding contact element, you can easily ground all shielded cables of
S7 modules, due to the direct contact of the shielding contact element to the rail.

'HVLJQRIWKHVKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
The shielding contact element consists of:
• a bracket for screw-mounting (with two screws) it onto the rail
(Order No.: 6ES5 390-5AA00-0AA0) and
• the shielding terminals.
You must use the following shielding terminals, depending on the shielding
diameter of your cables:

Table 7-8 Assigning the shielding diameter to shielding terminals

&DEOHZLWKVKLHOGLQJGLDPHWHU 6KLHOGLQJWHUPLQDO2UGHU1R
2 cables each one with a shielding diameter of 2 to 6 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0
mm
1 cable with a shielding diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
1 cable with a shielding diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

The shielding contact element width is 80 mm. It provides termination space in two
rows, each one for 4 shielding terminals.

0RXQWLQJWKHVKLHOGLQJFRQWDFWHOHPHQW
1. Push the two screw bolts of the fixing bracket into the guide on the underside of
the rail.
2. Position the bracket underneath the modules whose shielded cables are to be
terminated.
3. Screw-tighten the bracket onto the rail.
4. The shielding terminal is equipped with a slotted web underneath. Place the
shielding terminal at this position onto the edge of the bracket (see figure
below). Push the shield terminal down and swing it into the desired position.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-14 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

The two rows of the shielding contact element allow you install a maximum of
4 shielding terminals.

PS CP
U

1
3
2

Figure 7-6 Shielding contact element underneath two signal modules

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Bracket of shielding contact element
 Edge of bracket where the shielding terminal(s) must be placed.
 Shielding terminals

7HUPLQDWLQJFDEOHV
Only one or two shielded cables can be terminated per shielding terminal (see the
figure below). The cable is clamped in at the stripped cable shielding.
1. Strip the cable shielding to a length of at least 20 mm.
2. Clamp in the stripped cable shielding underneath the shielding contact clamp.
Push the shielding clamp towards the module (1) and feed the cable through
underneath the clamp (2).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-15
:LULQJ

If you need more than four shielding terminals, start wiring at the rear row of the
shielding contact element.

PS CP
U

Figure 7-7 Connecting 2-wire cables to the shielding contact element

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Magnified view of shielding terminal
 Wiring of shielding terminal

7LS
For your connection to the front connector, leave a sufficient cable length behind
the shielding terminal. This allows you to disconnect the front connector, e.g. for
repairs, without having to open the shielding contact element.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-16 A5E00105492-03
 :LULQJ

 :LULQJWKH%XV&RQQHFWRU

,QWURGXFWLRQ
You need to network the nodes if you want to create a multiple-node subnet. The
components you require here are listed in the Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&RQILJXULQJD
6XEQHW.
Information on how to wire the bus connector can be found in the article below.

:LULQJWKHEXVFDEOHWRWKHEXVFRQQHFWRU
%XVFRQQHFWRUZLWKVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
1. Strip the bus cable.
Details on stripped lengths are found in the product information included with
the bus connector.
2. Open the bus connector housing.
3. Insert the green and the red wire into the screw-terminal block.
Note that you always have to connect the same wires to the same terminal (e.g.
always wire green to terminal A and red to terminal B).
4. Press the cable sheath into the clamp. Take care that the bare shielding
contacts the shielding contact surface.
5. Screw-tighten the wire terminals.
6. Close the bus connector housing.
)DVW&RQQHFWEXVFRQQHFWRU
1. Strip the bus cable.
Details on stripped lengths are found in the product information included with
the bus connector.
2. Open the strain relief of the bus connector.
3. Insert the green and red wire into the open contacting covers.
Note that you always have to connect the same wires to the same terminal (e.g.
always wire green to terminal A and red to terminal B).
4. Close the contacting cover.
This presses the wires down into the insulation displacement terminals .
5. Screw-tighten the strain relief. Take care that the bare shielding contacts the
shielding contact surface.

1RWH
Use a bus connector with a 90° cable exit.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 7-17
:LULQJ

,QVHUWLQJWKHEXVFRQQHFWRULQWRWKHPRGXOH
1. Insert the wired bus connector into the module.
2. Screw-tighten the bus connector on the module.
3. If the bus connector is at the start or end of a segment, you have to enable the
terminating resistor (Switch position "ON" see figure below)

1RWH
6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0 bus connectors are not equipped with a terminating
resistor. You cannot connect it at the beginning or end of a segment.

Please make sure during start-up and normal operation that power is always
supplied to stations where the terminating resistor is active.

Terminating resistance switched on Terminating resistance switched off

on on

off off

On
On
Off

Off

Figure 7-8 Bus connector: Enabled and disabled terminating resistor

5HPRYLQJEXVFRQQHFWRUV
With a looped-through bus cable, you can unplug the bus connector from the
PROFIBUS-DP interface at any time, without interrupting data communication on
the network.

3RVVLEOHGDWDWUDIILFHUURUV

:DUQLQJ
Data traffic error might occur on the bus!
A bus segment must always be terminated at both ends with the terminating
resistor. This, for example, is not the case if the last slave with bus connector is off
power. Since the bus connector draws its power from the station, the terminating
resistor has no effect.
Please make sure that power is always supplied to stations on which the
terminating resistor is active.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
7-18 A5E00105492-03


$GGUHVVLQJ

 $GGUHVVLQJ

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
shows you the options for addressing specific module channels.

6ORWEDVHGDGGUHVVLQJ
Slot-based addressing is the default setting, that is, 67(3 assigns each slot
number a defined module start address.

8VHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
With user-defined addressing, you can assign any module address from the
address area managed by the CPU.

 6ORW'HILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV

,QWURGXFWLRQ
In slot-based addressing (default addressing), a module start address is allocated
to each slot number This is a digital or analog address, depending on the type of
module. This section shows you which module start address is assigned to which
slot number. You need this information to determine the start addresses of the
installed modules.

0D[LPXPDVVHPEO\DQGWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOHVWDUWDGGUHVVHV
The figure below shows you an S7-300 assembly on four racks and the optional
slots with their module start addresses.
The input and output addresses for I/O modules start from the same module start
address.

1RWH
With the CPU 31xC, you cannot insert any modules in Slot 11 of Rack 3. The
address area is reserved for the integrated I/O.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 8-1
$GGUHVVLQJ

Not with CPU 31xC

Rack 3 IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
(EG)

Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 96 100104 108 112 116 120 124
BG initial address analog 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752

Rack 2
(EG) IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM

Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92
BG initial address analog 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624

Rack 1
IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM
(EG)

Slot number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
BG initial address analog 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496

SF
SIEMEN S
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

Rack 0
STOP

(ZG) PS CPU IM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM

Slot number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BG initial address digital 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28
BG initial address analog 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368

Figure 8-1 S7-300 slots and the associated module start addresses

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
8-2 A5E00105492-03
 $GGUHVVLQJ

 8VHU'HILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV

8VHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
User-defined addressing means that you can assign an address of your choice to
any module (SM/FM/CP). The addresses are assigned in 67(3. Here, you
specify the module start address that forms the basis for all other addresses of the
module.

$GYDQWDJHVRIXVHUGHILQHGDGGUHVVLQJ
• Optimization of the address areas available, since “address gaps” will not occur
between the modules.
• When creating standard software, you can program addresses which are
independent of the relevant S7-300 configuration.

 $GGUHVVLQJ6LJQDO0RGXOHV

,QWURGXFWLRQ
This section shows you how to address signal modules. You need this information
in order to be able to address the channels of the signal modules in your user
program.

$GGUHVVHVRIGLJLWDOPRGXOHV
The address of an input or output of a digital module consists of a byte address
and a bit address.
Example: ,
This example consists of: input ,, byte address , and bit address 

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 8-3
$GGUHVVLQJ

The byte address depends on the module start address.

The bit address is the number printed on the module.
Insert the first digital module into slot 4 so that it has default start address 0. The
start address of every subsequent digital module will be incremented by 4 per slot
(see diagram under 6ORWEDVHGPRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJ
The figure below shows you how the addresses of the individual channels of a
digital module are obtained.

0
1
2
3 Byte address:
4 start address of modules
5
6
7

0
1
2
3 Byte address:
4 start address of modules + 1
5
6
7
Bit address

Figure 8-2 Addresses of the I/O of digital modules

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
8-4 A5E00105492-03
 $GGUHVVLQJ

$QH[DPSOHIRUGLJLWDOPRGXOHV
The example in the figure below shows which default addresses are obtained if a
digital module is inserted in slot 4 (that is, when the module start address is 0).
Slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the
example.

0 Address 0.0
1 Address 0.1
2
3
4 :
5 :
6
7 Address 0.7
:
PS CPU SM :
0 Address 1.0
1 Address 1.1
2
3
4 :
5 :
6
7 Address 1.7

Slot 1 2 4
number

Figure 8-3 I/O Addresses of a digital module in Slot 4

$GGUHVVHVRIWKHDQDORJPRGXOHV
The address of an analog input or output channel is always a word address.
The channel address depends on the module start address.
Insert the first analog module into slot 4 so that it has default start address 256.
The start address of every subsequent analog module will be incremented by 16
per slot (see diagram under 6ORWEDVHGPRGXOHDGGUHVVLQJ
An analog I/O module has the same start addresses for its input and output
channels.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 8-5
$GGUHVVLQJ

$QH[DPSOHIRUDQDORJPRGXOHV
The example in the figure below shows you which default channel addresses are
obtained if an analog module is inserted in slot 4. As you can see, the input and
output channels of an analog I/O module are addressed starting at the same
address, namely the module start address.
Slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the
example.

SM (analog module)

SF
SIEMENS Inputs
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
Channel 0: address 256
RUN Channel 1: address 258
STOP
:
:
Outputs
PS CPU SM Channel 0: address 256
Channel 1: address 258
:
:

Slot 1 2 4
number

Figure 8-4 I/O addresses of an analog module in Slot 4

 $GGUHVVLQJWKH,QWHJUDWHG,2RIWKH&38

&38&
The integrated inputs and outputs of this CPU have the following addresses:

Table 8-1 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 312C

,QSXWV2XWSXWV 'HIDXOWDGGUHVVHV 5HPDUNV

10 digital inputs 124.0 to 125.1 All digital inputs can be programmed
of those are 8 Inputs for as interrupt input.
technological functions:
124.0 to 124.7 Optional technological functions:
6 digital outputs 124.0 to 124.5 • Counting
of those are 2 Inputs for • Frequency measurement
technological functions:
124.0 to 124.1 • Pulse width modulation

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
8-6 A5E00105492-03
 $GGUHVVLQJ

&38&
The integrated inputs and outputs of this CPU have the following addresses:

Table 8-2 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C

,QSXWV2XWSXWV 'HIDXOWDGGUHVVHV 5HPDUNV

24 digital inputs 124.0 to 126.7 All digital inputs can be programmed
of those are 12 Inputs for as interrupt input.
technological functions:
124.0 to 125.0 Optional technological functions:
125.4 to 125.6
• Counting
16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7
• Frequency measurement
of those are 3 Inputs for
technological functions: • Pulse width modulation
124.0 to 124.2
4 +1 analog inputs 752 to 761
2 Analog outputs 752 to 755

&38&3W3DQG&38&'3
The integrated inputs and outputs of these CPUs have the following addresses:

Table 8-3 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 313C-2 PtP/DP

,QSXWV2XWSXWV 'HIDXOWDGGUHVVHV 5HPDUNV

16 digital inputs 124.0 to 125.7 All digital inputs can be programmed
of those are 12 Inputs for as interrupt input.
technological functions:
124.0 to 125.0 Optional technological functions:
125.4 to 125.6
• Counting
16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7
• Frequency measurement
of those are 3 Inputs for
technological functions: • Pulse width modulation
124.0 to 124.2

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 8-7
$GGUHVVLQJ

&38&3W3DQG&38&'3
The integrated inputs and outputs of these CPUs have the following addresses:

Table 8-4 Integrated inputs and outputs on the CPU 314C-2 PtP/DP

,QSXWV2XWSXWV 'HIDXOWDGGUHVVHV 5HPDUNV

24 digital inputs 124.0 to 126.7 All digital inputs can be programmed
of those are 16 Inputs for as interrupt input.
technological functions:
124.0 to 125.7 Optional technological functions:
16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7 • Counting
of those are 4 Inputs for • Frequency measurement
technological functions:
124.0 to 124.3 • Pulse width modulation

4 +1 analog inputs 752 to 761 • Positioning

2 Analog outputs 752 to 755

5HPDUNV
You cannot influence outputs with transfer instructions if they are assigned to
technological functions.
I/O not configured for technological functions can be used as standard I/O.

 &RQVLVWHQW'DWD

&RQVLVWHQWGDWD
The table below illustrates the points to consider with respect to communication
LQD'3PDVWHUV\VWHPif you want to transfer I/O areas with "Total length"
consistency.

&38'3&38'3&38[&
The address area of consistent data in the process image is automatically updated.
To read and write consistent data, you can also use SFC 14 and SFC 15.
If the address area of consistent data is not in the process image, you must use SFC 14
and SFC 15 to read and write consistent data.
Direct access to consistent areas is also possible (e.g. L PEW or T PAW).

You can transfer a maximum of 32 bytes of consistent data.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
8-8 A5E00105492-03


&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 ,QWKLV&KDSWHU

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
There are notes on commissioning which you should take into account in order to
avoid personal injury or damage to machines.

1RWH
Since your commissioning phase is determined primarily by your application, we
can only offer you general information, without claiming completeness of this topic.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Note the information about commissioning provided in the descriptions of your
plant section and equipment.

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ3URFHGXUH

5HTXLUHPHQWV
To utilize the full functional scope of the CPUs, you require
• STEP 7 V 5.1 + SP 4 and higher for CPUs 31xC, 312, 314, and 316-2 DP
• STEP 7 V 5.2 + SP 1 and higher for CPU 317-2 DP
• S7-300 is installed
• S7-300 is wired
• With networked S7-300:
– MPI/PROFIBUS addresses are configured
– The segments are terminated with active terminating resistors

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-1
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

5HFRPPHQGHGSURFHGXUH3DUW,+DUGZDUH
With its modular structure and many different upgrade options, the S7-300 can be
very large and extremely complex. It is therefore inappropriate to initially start up
an S7-300 with multiple racks and all inserted (installed) modules. Rather, we
recommend a step-by-step commissioning procedure.
We recommend the following initial commissioning procedure for an S7-300:

Table 9-1 Recommended commissioning procedure - part I: Hardware

7DVNV 5HPDUNV ,QIRUPDWLRQFDQEH

IRXQGLQ
an installation and wiring - in the following Chapter
check according to
checklist
Disabling connections to This prevents negative effects on your system as -
drive aggregates and a result of program errors.
control elements 7LS Redirecting output data from your outputs to
a data block, allows you to check the status of the
outputs at any time
Preparing the CPU Connecting the PG in the Chapter &RQQHFWLQJ
WKH3*
Central unit (CU): Commission the CU with inserted power supply in Chapter ,QLWLDO3RZHU
commission the CPU module and CPU. 2Q
and power supply, check First, switch on the expansion modules (EMs)
the LEDs which are equipped with an auxiliary power
supply module and then switch on the power
supply module of the CD.
Check the LED displays on both modules. in Chapter 7HVWLQJ
)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFV
DQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
Initialize the CPU and - in Chapter 5HVHWWLQJ&38
check the LEDs PHPRU\
CU: Insert further modules into the CU and Reference Manual
commission all other commission them in succession. 0RGXOH'DWD
modules
Expansion module (EM): If required, interconnect the CU and the EMs: Chapter 0RXQWLQJ
Connecting Insert only one Send IM into the CU and the
matching receiver IM into the EM.
EM: Insert further modules into the EMs and See above.
Commissioning commission them in succession.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-2 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

5HFRPPHQGHGSURFHGXUH3DUW,,6RIWZDUH

Table 9-2 Recommended commissioning procedure - part II: software

7DVNV 5HPDUNV ,QIRUPDWLRQFDQEH

IRXQGLQ
• Switch on the PG - in the 67(3
and start SIMATIC Programming Manual
Manager
• Download the
configuration and the
program to the CPU
Testing the I/O Helpful functions are here: • in the 67(3
• Monitoring and modifying of variables Programming Manual

• Testing with program status • in Chapter 7HVWLQJ

)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFV
• Force DQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ
• Modifying outputs in STOP mode (PO enable)
7LS Test the signals at the inputs and outputs
using the simulation module SM 374, for
example.
Commission PROFIBUS - in Chapter &RPPLVVLRQLQJ
DP or other networks 352),%86'3
Connect the outputs Commissioning the outputs successively. -

'DQJHU
Proceed step-by-step. Do not go to the next step unless you have completed the
previous one without error/error message.

5HVSRQVHWRHUURUV
React to errors as follows:
• Check the system with the help of the Checklist in the chapter below.
• Check the LED displays on all modules. Notes on their significance can be
found in the chapters describing the relevant modules.
• If required, remove individual components to trace the error.

,PSRUWDQWQRWHVDUHDOVRIRXQG
in Chapter 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQVGLDJQRVWLFVDQGIDXOWHOLPLQDWLRQ

VHHDOVR
Commissioning Checklist

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-3
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ&KHFNOLVW

,QWURGXFWLRQ
After you have mounted and wired your S7-300, we recommend you check all
previous steps once again.
The checklist tables below are a guide for your examination of the S7-300. They
also provide cross-references to chapters containing further information on the
relevant topic.

0RGXOHUDFNV

3RLQWVWREH([DPLQHG 6+DUGZDUHDQG
,QVWDOODWLRQ&KDSWHUV
Are the rails mounted firmly to the wall, in the frame or in Configuring, Installation
the cabinet?
Have you maintained free space required? Configuring, Installation
Are the cable ducts installed properly? Configuring
Is the air convection OK? Installation

&RQFHSWRIJURXQGLQJDQGFKDVVLVJURXQG

3RLQWVWREH([DPLQHG 6+DUGZDUHDQG
,QVWDOODWLRQ&KDSWHUV
Have you established a low-impedance connection Configuring, Appendix
(large surface, large contact area) to local ground?
Are all racks (rails) properly connected to reference Configuring, Wiring, Appendix
potential and local ground (electrical connection or
isolated operation)?
Are all grounding points of electrically connected Configuring, Appendix
modules and of the load power supply units connected
to reference potential ?

0RGXOHLQVWDOODWLRQDQGZLULQJ

3RLQWVWREH([DPLQHG 6+DUGZDUHDQG
,QVWDOODWLRQ&KDSWHUV
Are all modules properly inserted and screwed in? Installation
Are all front connectors properly wired, plugged, screw- Installation, Wiring
tightened or latched to the correct module?

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-4 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

0DLQVYROWDJH

3RLQWVWREHH[DPLQHG 6 6HH

+DUGZDUHDQG UHIHUHQFH
,QVWDOODWLRQ PDQXDO
&KDSWHUV 6HFWLRQ
Is the correct mains voltage set for all component? Wiring Module
Specifications

3RZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH

3RLQWVWREHH[DPLQHG 6 6HH

+DUGZDUHDQG UHIHUHQFH
,QVWDOODWLRQ PDQXDO
&KDSWHUV 6HFWLRQ
Is the mains plug wired correctly? Wiring -
Is mains voltage connected? - -

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-5
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH0RGXOHV

 &RQQHFWLQJWKH3*

5HTXLUHPHQW
The programming device must be equipped with an integrated MPI interface or an
MPI card in order to connect it to an MPI.

&DEOHOHQJWK
For information on possible cable lengths refer to the Chapter &RQILJXULQJ&DEOH
/HQJWKV.

&RQQHFWLQJD3*WRDQ6
1. Connect the PG to the MPI interface of your CPU  using a preassembled PG
cable. Alternatively, you can produce the connecting leads with PROFIBUS
cable and bus connectors yourself (refer to Chapter :LULQJ&RQQHFWLQJ%XV
&RQQHFWRUV). The figure below illustrates the connection between PG and CPU

SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

STOP

PS CPU SM
MPI

PG

Figure 9-1 Connecting a PG to an S7-300

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-6 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

&RQQHFWLQJWKH3*WRVHYHUDOQRGHV

6WDWLRQDU\3*
1. Use bus connectors to connect a stationary PG in the MPI subnet to the other
nodes of the MPI subnet.
The following picture illustrates two networked S7-300s which are connected to
one another using bus connectors.

PS CPU SM

PG
2

1
SF
SIEMENS
BUSF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN

ST OP

PS CPU SM

Figure 9-2 Connecting a PG to multiple S7-300 PLCs

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 PROFIBUS bus cable
 Connector with inserted terminating resistor

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-7
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

3*IRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJRUPDLQWHQDQFH
1. Use a stub cable to connect the commissioning and maintenance PG to the
other subnet nodes. The bus connector of these nodes must be equipped with a
PG socket.
The figure below shows the interconnection of two networked S7-300 and a PG.

PS CPU SM

PG 1

SF
SF
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
BUSF
BUSF
DC5V
DC5V

FRCE
FRCE

RUN
RUN

ST OP
STOP

PS CPU SM

Figure 9-3 Connecting a PG to a subnet

7KHGLDJUDPLOOXVWUDWHVXQGHUQXPEHU
 Stub cable used to create connection between PG and CPU
 Inserted terminating resistor of bus connector
 PROFIBUS bus cable used to network the two CPUs

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-8 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

03,DGGUHVVHVIRUVHUYLFH3*V
If there is no stationary PG, we recommend:
To connect it to an MPI subnet with "unknown" node addresses, set the following
addresses on the service PG:
• MPI address: 0
• Highest MPI address: 126.
Using 67(3, you then determine the highest MPI address in the MPI subnet and
adapt the highest MPI address in the PG to that of the MPI subnet.

&RQQHFWLQJ3*VWRXQJURXQGHGQRGHVRIDQ03,VXEQHWQRWZLWK&38V[&
&RQQHFWLQJD3*WRXQJURXQGHGQRGHV
Always connect an ungrounded PG to ungrounded MPI subnet nodes or S7-300
PLCs.
&RQQHFWLQJDJURXQGHG3*WRWKH03,
You want to operate with ungrounded nodes. If the MPI at the PG is grounded, you
must interconnect the nodes and the PG with an RS485 repeater. You must
connect the ungrounded nodes to bus segment 2 if the PG is connected to bus
segment 1 (terminals A1 B1) or to the PG/OP interface (refer to Chapter 7 in the
0RGXOH'DWD Reference Manual).
The figure below shows an RS485 repeater as interface between grounded and
ungrounded nodes of an MPI subnet.

PS CPU

PG

Bus segment 2 Bus segment 1

(signals ungrounded) (signals grounded)

Figure 9-4 PG connected to an ungrounded S7-300

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-9
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 ,QVHUWLQJ5HSODFLQJD0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&

6,0$7,&0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&DVPHPRU\PRGXOH

Your CPU uses a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) as a memory module. You
can set up the MMC as a load memory or a portable data medium.

1RWH
An inserted MMC is imperative for CPU operation.

1RWH
If the CPU is set to RUN and you remove the MMC, the CPU will STOP and
request a memory reset.

&DXWLRQ
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card
during write access. In this case you might have to insert the MMC memory in your
PG to delete it, or you format the card in the CPU.
Never remove an MMC in RUN mode. Always remove when power is off or when
the CPU is in STOP state and when the is not writing to the card. Disconnect the
communication lines if you are not sure whether or not the PG is performing write
functions (e.g. load/delete function block).

:DUQLQJ
Make sure that the MMC to be inserted contains the proper user program for the
CPU (system). An incorrect user program can lead to serious consequences in
your process.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-10 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

,QVHUWLQJUHSODFLQJWKH0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. Is an MMC already inserted?
If yes, ensure that no write operations are running on the PG (such as loading a
block). If you cannot ensure this state, disconnect all communication lines of the
CPU.
Now, push in the ejector and remove the MMC.
To you to remove the micro memory card, the module slot has an ejector device
(see the &38'DWDReference Manual, figure in the chapter entitled (OHPHQWV
DQG$VVHPEO\RIWKH&38).
Use a small screwdriver or ball-point pen to remove the MMC.
3. Insert the ("new") MMC into the MMC slot with the bevelled edge of the MMC
pointing towards the ejector.
4. Gently insert the MMC into the CPU until the MMC clicks into place.
5. Reset the memory of the CPU VHH5HVHWWLQJ0HPRU\YLD0RGH6HOHFWRURI
&38

CPU

Figure 9-5 Insert the micro memory card into the CPU

,QVHUWLQJDQGUHPRYLQJDQ00&ZKHQ&38SRZHULVVZLWFKHGRII
If you replace MMCs while the power is switched off, the CPUs
• will recognize a physically identical MMC with changed content
• a new MMC with the same content as the old MMC
After POWER ON, they request a memory reset.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Refer also to the section on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) in the CPU Data
Manual, Chapter &RQILJXUDWLRQDQG&RPPXQLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQVRID&38[&.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-11
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 ,QLWLDO3RZHU2Q

5HTXLUHPHQWV
• You must have installed and wired up the S7-300.
• The MMC is inserted in the CPU.
• Your CPU's mode selector switch must be set to STOP.

,QLWLDOSRZHUXSIRUD&38ZLWKPLFURPHPRU\FDUG00&
Switch on the PS 307 power supply module.
5HVXOW
• The 24 VDC LED on the power supply module is lit.
• The 5 VDC LED on the CPU
– is lit.
– The STOP LED flashes at 2 Hz when the CPU executes an automatic
memory reset.
– The STOP LED is lit after memory reset.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-12 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 5HVHWWLQJ0HPRU\YLDWKH0RGH6HOHFWRU6ZLWFKRIWKH&38

:KHQGR\RXUHVHW&38PHPRU\"
You must reset CPU memory,
• Before you download a (completely) new user program to the CPU
• If the CPU requests memory reset with its STOP LED flashing at 0.5 Hz
intervals Possible reasons for this request are listed in the table below .

Table 9-3 Possible causes for the CPU memory reset request

&DXVHVRID&38UHTXHVWWRUHVHW 5HPDUNV
PHPRU\
The MMC has been replaced -
RAM error in CPU -
The main memory is too small, that is, CPU with MMC inserted: A further memory reset
all blocks of the user program on an is requested.
MMC cannot be loaded. Additional information on MMC behavior after a
Attempts to load faulty blocks; e.g. if memory reset can be found in the &38'DWD
the wrong instruction was Reference Manual, 0HPRU\FRQFHSWchapter.
programmed.

+RZWRUHVHWPHPRU\
There are two ways to reset CPU memory:
0HPRU\UHVHWZLWKWKHPRGHVHOHFWRU 0HPRU\UHVHWZLWK3*
VZLWFK
... is described in this Chapter. ... only possible if the CPU is in STOP mode
(see 67(32QOLQH+HOS).

&38PHPRU\UHVHWZLWKWKHPRGHVHOHFWRUVZLWFK
The table below shows the steps required for resetting CPU memory.

Table 9-4 Procedure for resetting the CPU memory

6WHS 5HVHWWLQJ&38PHPRU\
1. Turn the key to STOP position
2. Turn the key to MRES position. Hold the key in this position until the STOP LED
lights up for the second time and remains on (this takes 3 seconds). Then
release the key.
3. You must turn the key to MRES position again within 3 seconds and hold it
there until the STOP LED flashes (at 2 Hz). You can now release the switch.
When the CPU has completed memory reset, the STOP LED stops flashing and
remains lit.
The CPU has reset the memory.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-13
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

The procedure described in the table above is only required if the user wishes to
reset the CPU memory without being requested by the CPU to reset the memory
(STOP LED flashing slowly). If the CPU prompts you for a memory reset, you only
have to turn the mode selector briefly to MRES position to initiate the memory reset
operation.

STOP
LED

on

off t
3s
max. 3 s
min. 3 s

CPU

1 2 3

Figure 9-6 Using the mode selector switch to reset the memory

If following a successful memory reset operation, the CPU prompts you for another
memory reset, the MMC may need to be reformatted in certain cases (VHH
)RUPDWWLQJD0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&).

6723/('GRHVQRWIODVKGXULQJWKHPHPRU\UHVHW
What should I do if the STOP LED does not flash during the memory reset or if
other LEDs are lit (Exception: BATF LED)?
1. You must repeat steps 2 and 3.
2. If the CPU still does not reset memory, evaluate the diagnostic buffer of the
CPU.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-14 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

:KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH&38GXULQJPHPRU\UHVHW"

Table 9-5 Operations in the CPU during a memory reset

(YHQW $FWLRQLQ&38
CPU activities 1. The CPU deletes the entire user program in the main memory.
2. The CPU deletes the retentive data.
3. The CPU tests its own hardware.
4. The CPU copies the sequence-relevant content of the MMC (load memory) to
the main memory.
7LS If the CPU cannot copy the MMC and prompts you for a memory reset:
• Remove the MMC
• Reset CPU memory
Read the diagnostic buffer.
Memory contents The user program is transferred from the MMC to the main memory again and the
after reset memory utilization is displayed accordingly.
What's left? Data in the diagnostics buffer.
You can read the diagnostic buffer with the PG (see 67(32QOLQH+HOS).
• The MPI parameters (MPI address and highest MPI address, transmission rate,
configured MPI addresses of CPs/FMs in an S7-300).
• The same also applies to the CPU 317-2 DP, if the MPI/DP interface of the CPU
was assigned as a DP interface (PROFIBUS address, highest PROFIBUS
address, baud rate, setting as active or passive interface).
Content of elapsed time counter

6SHFLDOIHDWXUH;LQWHUIDFHSDUDPHWHU
MPI parameters (or DP parameters in the case of MPI/DP interfaces) have a
special setting for memory reset. The table below describes which interface
parameters are valid after the memory reset.

0HPRU\UHVHW 03,SDUDPHWHUV
With MMC inserted MPI parameter on the MMC or integrated
read-only load memory are valid. If this
location does not contain parameter data
(SDB), the previously set parameters stay
valid.
Without micro memory card (MMC) inserted ... are retained and valid.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-15
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 )RUPDWWLQJWKH0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&

<RXPXVWIRUPDWWKH00&LQWKHIROORZLQJFDVHV
• Module type of MMC is not a user module.
• MMC has not yet been formatted.
• MMC is defective.
• Content of MMC is invalid.
The content of the MCC was identified as invalid.
• The /RDGXVHUSURJUDP operation was aborted by a power OFF.
• The 3URPPLQJoperation was aborted by a power OFF.
• Error during evaluation of module content during memory reset.
• Error during formatting, or formatting could not be performed.
If one of these errors has occurred, the CPU prompts you for another memory
reset after a memory reset operation has been performed. The card content is
retained until the MMC is formatted, except when the Load user program or
promming operations are interrupted by a power OFF.
The MMC is only formatted if a reason for formatting exists (see above) and not, for
example, when you are prompted for a memory reset after a module replacement.
In this case, a switch to MRES triggers a normal memory reset for which the
module content remains valid..

8VHWKHIROORZLQJVWHSVWRIRUPDW\RXU00&
If the CPU is prompting you for a memory reset (slow flashing of STOP LED),
format the MMC using the following switch inputs:
1. Turn the switch to MRES position and hold it there until illumination of the STOP
LED is steady (about 9 seconds).
2. Release the switch within the next 3 seconds and then turn it to MRES position
again. The STOP-LED now flashes during the formatting.

1RWH
Make sure to perform the steps in the specified time. Otherwise, the MMS will not
be formatted and will instead return to the memory reset prompt state.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-16 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 6WDUWLQJ6,0$7,&0DQDJHU

,QWURGXFWLRQ
SIMATIC Manager is a GUI for online/offline editing of S7 objects (projects, user
programs, blocks, hardware Stations and Tools).
The SIMATIC Manager lets you
• manage projects and libraries,
• call STEP 7 Tools,
• access the PLC (AS) online,
• edit Memory Cards.

6WDUWLQJ6,0$7,&0DQDJHU
After installation, the Windows desktop displays the 6,0$7,&0DQDJHU icon and in
the Start menu under 6,0$7,& it displays the program item 6,0$7,&0DQDJHU.
1. Start SIMATIC Manager with a double-click on the icon or via Start menu (same
as with all other Windows applications).

8VHULQWHUIDFH
A corresponding editing tool pops up when you open the relevant objects. Double-
click on a program block starts the program editor; the block can be edited (object-
oriented start).

2QOLQH+HOS
The Online Help for the active window is always called with the F1 function key.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-17
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 0RQLWRULQJDQGFRQWUROOLQJ,2V

7KHWRRO0RQLWRULQJDQG&RQWUROOLQJD9DULDEOH
The STEP 7 tool "Monitoring and Controlling a Variable" lets you
• monitor program variables in any format,
• edit the status or data of variables in the CPU (controlling).

&UHDWHDYDULDEOHWDEOH
You have two options for creating a variable table (VAT):
• in the ladder diagram/sequential function chart/statement list editor via menu
item 3/&!0RQLWRUFRQWUROYDULDEOH
This table is also available directly online
• in SIMATIC Manager with the %ORFNVcontainer open via menu item ,QVHUWQHZ
REMHFW!9DULDEOHWDEOH
This table created offline can be saved for future retrieval. You can also test it
after switching to online mode.
9$7VWUXFWXUH
In the VAT, every address to be monitored or modified (e.g. inputs, outputs)
occupies one row.
The meaning of the VAT columns is as follows:

&ROXPQWH[W 7KLVILHOG
Operand contains the absolute address of the variable
Symbol contains the symbolic descriptor of the variable
This is identical to the specification in the Symbol Table.
Symbol comment shows the symbol comment of the Symbol Table
Status format contains the default format setting, e.g. HEX
You can change the format as follows:
• Right-click on the format field. The Format List pops up.
or
• Left-click on the format field until the desired format appears
Status value shows the content of the variable at the time of update
Control value is used to enter the new variable value (control value)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-18 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

0RQLWRULQJYDULDEOHV

You have two options for monitoring variables:

• updating the status values once via menu item 9DULDEOH!8SGDWHVWDWXV
YDOXHV
or
• continuous update of status values via menu item 9DULDEOH!0RQLWRU

&RQWUROOLQJYDULDEOHV
To control variables, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click the field &RQWUROYDOXH of the relevant variable.
2. Enter the control value according to the data type.
3. To update control values once, select the menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH
FRQWUROYDOXHV.
or
Enable control values permanently via menu item 9DULDEOH!&RQWURO.
4. In the 0RQLWRU test function, verify the control value entry in the variable.
,VWKHFRQWUROYDOXHYDOLG"
You can disable the control value entered in the table. An invalid value is displayed
same as a comment. You can re-enable the control value.
Only valid control values can be enabled.

6HWWLQJWKHWULJJHUSRLQWV
7ULJJHUSRLQWV
• The "Trigger point for monitoring" determines the time of update for values of
variables to be monitored.
• The "Trigger point for controlling" determines the time for assigning the control
values to the variables to be controlled.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-19
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

7ULJJHUFRQGLWLRQ
• The "Trigger condition for monitoring" determines whether to update values
once when the trigger point is reached or continuously every time the trigger
point is reached.
• The "Trigger condition for controlling" determines whether to assign control
values once or permanently to the variable to be controlled.
You can customize the trigger points using the tool "Monitor and control variable" in
menu item 9DULDEOH!6HW7ULJJHUstart.
6SHFLDOIHDWXUHV
• If "Trigger condition for monitoring" is set to RQFH, the menu items 9DULDEOH!
8SGDWHVWDWXVYDOXHor9DULDEOH!0RQLWRU have the same effect, namely a
single update.
• If "Trigger condition for controlling" is set to RQFH, the menu items 9DULDEOH!
8SGDWHFRQWUROYDOXHor9DULDEOH!&RQWURO have the same effect, namely a
one-time assignment.
• If trigger conditions are set toSHUPDQHQW, the said menu items have different
effects as described above.
• If monitoring and controlling is set to the same trigger point, monitoring is
executed first.
• With some CPU versions (e.g. CPU 314-1AE03) values are not assigned at
every cycle when SHUPDQHQWFRQWUROis set.
Remedy: Use the testing function)RUFH.

6DYLQJ2SHQLQJWKH9DULDEOH7DEOH
6DYLQJWKH9$7
1. After you abort or complete a test phase, you can save the variable table to
memory. The name of a variable table starts with the letters VAT, followed by a
number from 0 to 65535; e.g. VAT5.
2SHQLQJWKH9$7
1. Select the menu item 7DEOH!2SHQ.
2. Select the project name in the2SHQdialog.
3. In the project window below, select the relevant program and mark the %ORFNV
container.
4. In the block window, select the desired table.
5. Confirm with2..

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-20 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

(VWDEOLVKLQJDFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH&38
The variables of a VAT represent variable quantities of a user program. In order to
monitor or control variables it is required to establish a connection to the relevant
CPU. Every variable tables can be linked to another CPU.
In menu item 3/&!&RQQHFWWR, establish a connection to one of the following
CPUs:
• configured CPU
• directly connected CPU
• available CPU ...
The table below lists the display of variables.

&38V 7KH&38YDULDEOHVDUHGLVSOD\HG
configured CPU in their S7 program (Hardware Station) in which the VAT is
stored.
directly connected CPU that is connected directly to the PG.
available CPU. that is selected in the dialog window.
Menu item 3/&!&RQQHFWWR!$YDLODEOH&38 is
used to establish a connection to any CPU available on
the network.

&RQWUROOLQJRXWSXWVLQ&386723PRGH
The function(QDEOH32 switches off output disable for the peripheral outputs
(PO), thus enabling control of the PO in CPU STOP mode.
In order to enable the POs, proceed as follows:
1. In menu item 7DEOH!2SHQWKHYDULDEOHWDEOH9$7, open the VAT that
contains the PO you want to control, or activate the window containing the
corresponding VAT.
2. To control the PO of the active VAT, select the CPU connection in menu
command 3/&!&RQQHFWWR.
3. Use menu command 3/&!2SHUDWLQJ0RGH to open the 2SHUDWLQJ0RGH
dialog and switch the CPU to STOP mode.
4. Enter your values in the "Control value" column for the PO you want to control.
Example:
PO: POB 7 control value: 2#0100 0011
POW 2 W#16#0027
POD 4 DW#16#0001
5. Use menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH32 to switch to "Enable PO" mode.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-21
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

6. Control the PO via menu item 9DULDEOH!(QDEOHFRQWUROYDOXHV. "Enable PO“

mode remains active until switched off again via 9DULDEOH!(QDEOH32.
"Enable PO" is also terminated when the connection to the PG goes down.
7. Return to step 4 if you want to specify new values.

1RWH
For example, a message pops up to indicate CPU mode transition from STOP
to RUN or START-UP.
A message also pops up indicating that the "Enable PO" function is selected
while the CPU is in RUN mode.

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ352),%86'3

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ352),%86'3

5HTXLUHPHQWV
Requirement for commissioning a PROFIBUS DP network is:
• A PROFIBUS DP network has been created.
• In 67(3, you have configured the PROFIBUS DP network and you have
assigned all network nodes a PROFIBUS DP address and memory area (see
the Manual 6,0$7,&67(39[&RQILJXULQJKDUGZDUHDQGFRQQHFWLRQVZLWK
67(39[).
• Note that you must also set address switches in some of the DP slaves (see the
description of the relevant DP slave).
• Software requirements are shown in the table below, depending on the CPU:

Table 9-6 Software requirements

&38 2UGHU1R 6RIWZDUHUHTXLUHG

313C-2DP 6ES/313-6CE00-0AB0 67(3 V 5.1 or later + SP 4
314C-2DP 6ES7314-6CF00-0AB0 &20352),%86 V 5.0 or later
315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 67(3 V 5.1 or later + SP 4
317-2 DP 6ES7317-2EJ10-0AB0 67(3 V 5.2 + SP 1 or later

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-22 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

'3DGGUHVVDUHDVRIWKH&38V

Table 9-7 DP address areas of the CPUs

$GGUHVVDUHD &'3&'3 '3 '3

DP address area 1024 bytes 2048 bytes 8192 bytes
for I/O
Number of those in the I/O Bytes 0 to 127 Bytes 0 to 127 Bytes 0 to 255
process image

'3GLDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV occupy 1 byte per DP master and DP slave in the input

address area. For example, at these addresses DP standard diagnostics can be
called for the relevant node (LADDR parameter of SFC 13). The DP diagnostic
addresses are specified in your configuration. If you do not specify any DP
diagnostic addresses, 67(3 assigns these DP diagnostic addresses, starting at
the highest byte address downwards .
In the case of a CPU 31xC-2 DP or CPU 31x-2 DP assigned as a master, two
different diagnostic addresses must be assigned for S7 slaves.
• Diagnostic address of the slave (address for slot 0)
At this address all slave events are reported in the DP master (station
representative), e.g. station failure.
• Diagnostic address of the module (address for slot 2)
At this address all module (e.g. CPU 313C-2 DP as I-Slave) events are reported
in the master (OB82). With a CPU as DP-Slave, for example, diagnostic
interrupts for operating mode transitions are reported at this address.

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH&38DV'30DVWHU

5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
• The PROFIBUS subnet has been configured.
• The DP slaves are ready for operation (see relevant DP slave manual).
• If the MPI/DP interface is a DP interface, you must configure the interface as a
DP interface (CPU 317-2 DP only).
• You must configure the CPU as DP master prior to commissioning. That is, in
67(3 you must:
– configure the CPU as a DP master,
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the CPU,
– assign a master diagnostic address to the CPU,
– integrate the DP slaves into the DP master system.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-23
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

Is the DP CPU a DP slave?

If so, you will find that DP slave in the PROFIBUS-DP catalog as DOUHDG\
FRQILJXUHGVWDWLRQ. In the DP master, assign a slave diagnostic address to
this DP slave CPU. You must interconnect the DP master with the DP slave
CPU and specify the address areas for data exchange with the DP slave
CPU.

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
Commission the DP CPU as a DP master in the PROFIBUS subnet as follows:
1. Download the configuration of the PROFIBUS subnet created with 67(3
(preset configuration) to the DP CPU using the PG.
2. Switch on all of the DP slaves.
3. Switch the DP CPU from STOP to RUN.

6WDUWXSRI'3&38DVD'30DVWHU
During start-up, the DP CPU checks the configured preset configuration of its DP
master system against the actual configuration.
If preset configuration = actual configuration, the CPU switches to RUN mode.
If the preset configuration ≠ to the actual configuration, the configuration of
parameter VWDUWXSLISUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQzDFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ determines
the start-up behavior of the CPU.

6WDUWXSZLWKSUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQz 6WDUWXSZLWKSUHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQz
DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ \HV'HIDXOW DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ QR
VHWWLQJ
DP CPU switches to RUN. DP CPU remains in STOP mode, and the
(BUSF LED flashes if any of the DP slaves BUS LED flashes after the set 0RQLWRULQJ
cannot be addressed) WLPHIRUWUDQVIHURISDUDPHWHUVWR
PRGXOHV.
The flashing BUSF LED indicates that at
least one DP slave cannot be accessed. In
this case, check whether all DP slaves are
switched on or correspond with your
configuration, or read out the diagnostic
buffer with 67(3.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-24 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

5HFRJQL]LQJWKHRSHUDWLQJVWDWHRI'3VODYHV(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how the DP CPU operating as a DP master recognizes
operating mode transitions of a CPU operating as a DP slave or data exchange
interruptions.

Table 9-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP master

(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3PDVWHU"
Bus failure interrupt • Call of OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH
(short-circuit, (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
connector the DP master)
unplugged)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122
(I/O access error)
DP slave: • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
RUN → STOP (incoming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
STOP → RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the DP-Slave assigned to
the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

7LS:
When commissioning the CPU as DP master, always program OB82 and OB86.
This helps you to recognize and evaluate data exchange errors or interruption.

3URJUDPPLQJVWDWXVFRQWUROYLD352),%86
As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the CPU or execute the
PG's status and control functions via the PROFIBUS-DP interface.

1RWH
The use of Status and Control function via the PROFIBUS-DP interface extends
the DP cycle.

&RQVWDQWEXVF\FOHWLPH
As of 67(3 V 5.x you can configure equidistant lengths for PROFIBUS subnet
(constant bus cycle time) bus cycles. Details on constant bus cycle time are found
in the 6WHS2QOLQH+HOS.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-25
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

6WDUWXSRIWKH'3PDVWHUV\VWHP

&38['3[&'3LVD'3PDVWHU
Customize the start-up monitoring time for DP slaves in parameter 0RQLWRULQJWLPHIRU
SDUDPHWHUWUDQVIHUWRPRGXOHV.
That is, the DP slaves must start up within the set time and be configured by the CPU (as
DP master).

352),%86DGGUHVVRIWKH'3PDVWHU
For the DP CPU, you must QRWset as a PROFIBUS address.

 &RPPLVVLRQLQJWKH&38DV'36ODYH

5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
• The DP master is configured and programmed.
• If the MPI/DP interface of CPU 317-2 DP is to be operated as DP interface, you
must configure the interface accordingly.
• Prior to commissioning, you must assign and configure the DP CPU as a DP
slave. That is, in 67(3 you must:
– "switch on" the CPU as DP slave,
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the CPU,
– assign a slave diagnostic address to the CPU,
– specify whether the DP master is an S7 DP master or another DP master,
– specify the address areas for data exchange with the DP master.
• All other DP slaves are programmed and configured.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Information on changing over to a CPU 31xC, 312, 314, 315-2 DP, and 317-2DP
can be found in the applicable section in the&38'DWD[&DQG[Reference
Manual

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-26 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

*6')LOHV
If you are working on an IM 308-C or third party system, you require a GSD file in
order to be able to configure the DP CPU as a DP slave in a DP master system.
&20352),%86 as of V 4.0 includes this GSD file.
When working with an older version or another configuration tool, you can
download the GSD file under:
• Internet URL http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/gsd
or
• via modem from the 66&(Interface &HQWHU Fürth, Germany; Phone number
(0911) 737972.

1RWH
This note is applicable to CPU 31xC-2 DP, CPU 315-2 DP, and CPU 317-2 DP. If
you wish to use the CPU as a standard slave via the GSD file, then you must not
tick the Commissioning / Test mode check box under the DP interface properties
when you configure this slave CPU in STEP 7.

&RQILJXUDWLRQDQGSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWPHVVDJHIUDPH
67(3 assists you during configuration and parameter assignment of the DP
CPU. Should you require a description of the configuration and parameter
assignment frame, in order to use a bus monitor for example, you can find it on the
Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo under article ID 1452338.

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
Commission the DP CPU as a DP slave in the PROFIBUS subnet as follows:
1. Switch on power, but hold the CPU in STOP mode.
2. First, switch on all other DP masters/slaves.
3. Now switch the CPU to RUN mode.

6WDUWXSRI'3&38DVD'3VODYH
When the DP-CPU is switched to RUN mode, two mutually independent operating
mode transitions are executed:
• The &38 switches from STOP to RUN mode.
• At the 352),%86'3LQWHUIDFH the CPU starts data transfer with the DP
master.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-27
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

5HFRJQL]LQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6WDWHRIWKH'3PDVWHU(YHQW5HFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how the DP CPU operating as a DP slave recognizes
operating state transitions or data exchange interruptions.

Table 9-9 Event recognition for CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP as the DP slave

(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3VODYH"
Bus failure interrupt • Call of OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH
(short-circuit, (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
connector the DP slave)
unplugged)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122
(I/O access error)
DP master. • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
RUN → STOP (coming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP master • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
STOP → RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

7LS:
When commissioning the CPU as DP slave, always program OB82 and OB86. This
helps you to recognize and evaluate the respective operating states or data
exchange errors.

3URJUDPPLQJVWDWXVFRQWUROYLD352),%86
As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the CPU or execute the
PG's status and control functions via the PROFIBUS-DP interface. To do so, you
must enable these functions when configuring the CPU as a DP slave in 67(3.
This is not required for CPU 300 C.

1RWH
The use of Status and Control function via the PROFIBUS-DP interface extends
the DP cycle.

'DWDWUDQVIHUYLDLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
The DP-CPU operating as a DP slave provides an intermediate memory for the
PROFIBUS DP. All data exchange between the CPU as DP slave and the DP
master takes place via this intermediate memory. You can configure up to
32 address areas for this function.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-28 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

That is, the DP master writes its Data to these intermediate memory address areas
and the CPU reads these data in the user program, and vice versa.

DP master CPU as DP slave

Transfer memory I/Q I/Q

in the address
area

PROFIBUS

Figure 9-7 Intermediate memory in a DP CPU operating as a DP slave

$GGUHVVDUHDVLQLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
In 67(3, configure the I/O address areas:
• You can configure up to 32 I/O address areas.
• Maximum length per address area is 32 bytes.
• You can configure a maximum of 244 input bytes and 244 outputs bytes.
The table below shows the principle of address areas. You can also find this figure
in the 67(3 configuration.

Table 9-10 Configuration example for the address areas in intermediate memory

 7\SH 0DVWHU 7\SH 6ODYH /HQJW 8QLW &RQVLVWHQF\

DGGUHVV DGGUHVV K
1 E 222 A 310 2 Byte Unit
2 A 0 E 13 10 Word Total length
:
32
Address areas in the Address areas in the These address area parameters
DP master CPU DP slave CPU must be identical for DP master and
DP slave

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-29
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

6DPSOHSURJUDP
Below you will see a small sample program for data exchange between DP master
and DP slave. The addresses used in the example are found in the table above.

,QWKH'3VODYH&38 ,QWKH'3PDVWHU&38
L 2 //Data pre-
T MB 6 processing in
the
L IB 0
DP slave
T MB 7
L MW 6 // Forward data
T PQW 310 to the
DP master
L PIB 222 // processing data
received
T MB 50
in the DP master
L PIB 223
.
L B#16#3
+ I
T MB 51
L 10 //Data preparation in
DP master

+ 3
T MB 60
CALL SFC 15 //Send data to
DP slave
LADDR:= W#16#0
RECORD:= P#M60.0 Byte 20
RET_VAL:=MW 22
CALL SFC 14 //receive data
LADDR:=W#16#D from DP master
RET_VAL:=MW 20
RECORD:=P#M30.0 byte 20
L MB 30 //Reprocess
received data
L MB 7
+ I
T MW 100

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-30 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

:RUNLQJZLWKLQWHUPHGLDWHPHPRU\
Note the following rules when working with intermediate memory:
• Assignment of address areas:
– Input data of DP slaves are DOZD\V output data of the DP master
– Output data of DP slaves are DOZD\V input data of the DP master
• The user can define these addresses. In the user program, access data with
load/transfer instructions or with SFC 14 and SFC 15. You can also specify
addresses from the input/output process image (refer to Chapter $GGUHVVLQJ
8VHUGHILQHG$GGUHVVLQJRI0RGXOHV).
• The lowest address of specific address areas is their respective area start
address.
• The length, unit and consistency of the address areas for DP master and DP
slave must be identical.

1RWH
Assign addresses from the DP address area of the DP CPU for the intermediate
memory.
You must not assign addresses specified for the intermediate memory again for
the I/O modules on the DP CPU. When using consistent data areas in
intermediate memory, note the section on &RQVLVWHQW'DWD in Chapter
$GGUHVVLQJ.

6'3PDVWHU
If you use an IM 308-C as a DP master and the DP CPU as a DP slave, the
following applies to the exchange of consistent data.
You must program FB192 in IM 308-C to enable exchange of consistent data
between a DP master and the DP slave. With the FB192, the data of the DP CPU
are only output or read out in a consistent block.

6DV'3PDVWHU
If you set up an AG S5-95 as a DP master, you must also set its bus parameters
for the DP CPU as a DP slave.

'DWDWUDQVIHULQ6723PRGH
The DP slave CPU goes into STOP mode: Data in CPU intermediate memory are
overwritten with "0". That is, the DP master reads "0".
The DP master goes into STOP mode: Actual data in CPU intermediate memory is
maintained and can still be read by the CPU.

352),%86DGGUHVV
For the DP CPU, you must QRWset as a PROFIBUS address.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-31
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

 'LUHFW'DWD([FKDQJH

5HTXLUHPHQW
In 67(3 V 5.x or later, you can configure "Direct data exchange" for PROFIBUS
nodes. CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP can participate in direct data exchange both as
a sending or receiving station.

'HILQLWLRQ
"Direct data exchange" is a special communication relationship between
PROFIBUS-DP nodes.
Characteristic of direct data exchange is that PROFIBUS DP nodes "listen" on the
bus for data a DP slave returns to its DP master. This mechanism allows "Listening
stations" (receivers) direct access to modified input data of remote DP slaves.

$GGUHVVDUHDV
In your 67(3 configuration of the relevant peripheral input addresses, specify
which address area of the receiving station is to receive data requested from the
sending station.
A CPU 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP can operate as a:
• DP slave sending station
• receiving station, as DP slave or DP master, or as CPU not integrated in a
master system.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-32 A5E00105492-03
 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ

([DPSOH
The sample in the figure below shows the relationships you can configure for direct
data exchange. In the figure, all DP masters DP slaves are a CPU 31x-2 DP/31xC-
2 DP respectively. Note that other DP slaves (ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200S) can
only operate as sending station.

DP master DP master
system 1 system 2

CPU CPU
CPU DP master 1 DP master 2

PROFIBUS

DP slave 3 CPU DP slave 5

CPU CPU
DP slave 4
DP slave 1 DP slave 2

Figure 9-8 Direct data exchange with CPUs 31x-2 DP/31xC-2 DP

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 9-33
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
9-34 A5E00105492-03


0DLQWHQDQFH

 ,QWKLV&KDSWHU

0DLQWHQDQFH RSHUDWLQJV\VWHPEDFNXSXSGDWHUHSODFHPHQWRIPRGXOHVDQG
IXVHV
S7-300 is a maintenance-free automation system.
Thus, by maintenance we mean
• Back-up of operating system on a Micro Memory Card (MMC)
• Update of operating system by MMC
• Replacement of modules
• Replacement of the fuses in digital output modules

,QWKLV&KDSWHU
we show you how to back up or update your operating system and to replace
modules, the back-up/rechargeable battery and the 120/230 VAC fuse of the digital
output module.

 2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP%DFN8S

,QZKLFKVLWXDWLRQVVKRXOG,EDFNXSWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
In some cases, we recommend that you back up your CPU's operating system:
For example, you might want to replace the CPU in your plant with a CPU from
store. In this case, you should make sure that the CPU from store has the same
operating system that is used in the plant.
We also recommend that you create a back-up copy of the operating system for
emergency situations.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 10-1
0DLQWHQDQFH

:KLFK&38VDOORZPHWREDFNXSWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
You can back up the operating system as of the following CPU versions:

&38 2UGHU1R )LUPZDUH 5HTXLUHG00&

312 from 6ES7312-1AD10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
314 from 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
315-2 DP from 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 V 2.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
312C from 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
313C from 6ES73133-5BE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
313C-2DP from 6ES73133-6CE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
313C-2 PtP from 6ES73133-6BE00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
314C-2DP from 6ES7314-6CF00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB
314C-2 PtP from 6ES7314-6BF00-0AB0 V 1.0.0 or later MMC ≥ 2 MB
317-2 DP from 6ES7317-2AJ10-0AB0 V 2.1.0 or later MMC ≥ 4 MB

%DFNXSRIRSHUDWLQJV\VWHPRQ0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG
How to back up the operating system:

Table 10-1 Back-up of operating system on MMC

6WHS $FWLRQUHTXLUHG &385HVSRQVH

1. Insert new micro memory card into The CPU requests memory reset
the CPU
2. Turn the mode selector switch to -
MRES position and hold it there.
3. POWER OFF / POWER ON. Hold ... the STOP, RUN and FRCE LEDs start
the mode selector switch in MRES flashing.
position until ...
4. Mode selector switch to STOP -
position.
5. Mode selector switch briefly to • CPU starts backing up operating
MRES position, then let it return to system on the MMC.
STOP. • All LEDs are lit during the back-up.
• After completion of the backup, the
STOP LED flashes. The CPU
prompts you for a memory reset.
6. Remove Micro Memory Card. -

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
10-2 A5E00105492-03
 0DLQWHQDQFH

 8SGDWLQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP

,QZKLFKVLWXDWLRQVVKRXOG,XSGDWHWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
After (compatible) function expansions or after an enhancement of operating
system performance the operating system should be upgraded to the latest version
(update).

:KHUHGR,JHWWKHODWHVWYHUVLRQRIWKHRSHUDWLQJV\VWHP"
You can obtain the latest operating system versions from your Siemens partner or
from the Internet (Siemens home page; Automation and Drives, Customer
Support).

7LSEDFNXS\RXURSHUDWLQJV\VWHPEHIRUH\RXXSGDWHLW
If you back up your operating system on a blank MMC before the update, you can
reload the "old" operating system if any problems occur.

8SGDWLQJWKH2SHUDWLQJ6\VWHP
How to update the operating system (OS):

Table 10-2 Updating the operating system with MC/MMC

6WHS $FWLRQUHTXLUHG &385HVSRQVH

1. Transfer update files to a blank -
MMC using STEP 7 and your
programming device.
2. De-energize the CPU and insert -
an MMC containing the operating
system update.
3. POWER ON. • The CPU detects the MMC with the
operating system update automatically
and starts the operating system update.
• All LEDs are lit during OS update.
• After completion of the operating system
update, the STOP LED flashes. The
CPU prompts you for a memory reset.
4. De-energize the CPU and -
remove the MMC containing the
operating system update.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 10-3
0DLQWHQDQFH

 0RGXOHUHSODFHPHQW

5XOHVIRU,QVWDOODWLRQDQG:LULQJ
The table below shows you points to follow when wiring, installing or removing of
S7-300 modules.

5XOHVJRYHUQLQJ 3RZHUVXSSO\ &38 60)0&3

Blade width of screwdriver 3.5 mm (cylindrical model)
Tightening torque
• Attaching modules to the rail from 0.8 N/m to 1.1 N/m from 0.8 N/m to
• Connecting cables 1.1 N/m
from 0.5 N/m to 0.8 N/m –
POWER OFF when replacing the Yes Yes
...
S7-300 operating mode when – STOP
replacing ...
Load voltage OFF when Yes Yes
replacing the ...

,QLWLDO6LWXDWLRQ
The module you want to replace is still installed and wired. You want to install the
same type of module.

:DUQLQJ
Disturbances can corrupt data if you insert or remove S7-300 modules while data
is being transferred via MPI. Do not replace S7-300 modules while there is data
traffic on the MPI. If you are not certain whether or not data transfer is active on the
MPI, unplug the connector on the MPI before you replace the module.


S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
10-4 A5E00105492-03
 0DLQWHQDQFH

5HPRYLQJDPRGXOH60)0&3
Remove the module as follows:

6WHS SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU SLQIURQWFRQQHFWRU

1. Switch the CPU to STOP.
2. Switch off the load voltage to the module.
3. Remove the labeling strip from the module.
4. Open the front panel.
5. Unlock the front connector and remove it.
Press down the unlocking Remove the fixing screw from the middle
mechanism with one hand and with of the front connector. Pull the front
the other hand, pull out the front connector out, holding it at the grips.
connector at the grips.
6. Undo the module fixing screw(s).
7. Swing the module out.

3
1

PS
CPU
2

Figure 10-1 Unlocking the front connector and removing the module

7KLVILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHVWHSVGHVFULEHG
 Remove labeling strips.
 Open module.
 Press unlocking mechanism/loosen mounting screw, and pull out front connector.
 Remove mounting screw of module and tilt module out.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 10-5
0DLQWHQDQFH

5HPRYLQJWKHIURQWFRQQHFWRUFRGLQJSLQIURPWKHPRGXOH
Before you start installing the new module, remove the upper part of the front
connector coding pin from this module.
Reason: This part is already inserted in the wired front connector.

Figure 10-2 Removing the front connector coding pin

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
10-6 A5E00105492-03
 0DLQWHQDQFH

,QVWDOOLQJDQHZPRGXOH
Install the new module as follows:
1. Install new module of same type.
2. Pivot the module down into place.
3. Screw-tighten the module.
4. Slide the labeling strips into the module.

1
4

PS C
PU

3 2

Figure 10-3 Installing a new module

7KHILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHGHVFULEHGVWHSV
 Lower module onto rail.
 Tilt module down.
 Screw the module in tightly.
 Insert labeling strips.

5HPRYLQJWKH)URQW&RQQHFWRU&RGLQJ
If you want to take a "used" front connector to wire another module, you can
remove its coding mechanism:
Simply push out the front connector coding with a screwdriver.
This upper part of the coding key must then be plugged back into the old module.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 10-7
0DLQWHQDQFH

3XWWLQJD1HZ0RGXOHLQWR6HUYLFH
Proceed as follows to put the new module into service:
1. Open the front panel.
2. Reinstall the front connector.
3. Close the front panel.
4. Switch the load voltage back on.
5. Set the CPU to RUN mode again.

2
PS CPU

Figure 10-4 Inserting the front connector

7KHILJXUHLOOXVWUDWHVWKHGHVFULEHGVWHSV
 Move the front connector into operating position
 Close front panel.

%HKDYLRURI6DIWHUPRGXOHUHSODFHPHQW
After module replacement the CPU switches to run mode, provided no error has
occurred. If the CPU maintains STOP status, you can view the cause of error with
67(3 (refer to the 67(3 User Manual).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
10-8 A5E00105492-03
 0DLQWHQDQFH

 'LJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOH$&95HSODFLQJWKHIXVHV

)XVHVIRU'LJLWDO2XWSXWV
the digital outputs of the following digital output modules are short-circuit protected
by individual fusing of the channel groups:
• Digit output module SM 322; DO 16 × A 120 V
• Digit output module SM 322; DO 8 × A 120 230 V

6\VWHPFKHFN
Eliminate the causes of fuse tripping.

5HSODFHPHQWIXVHV
If replacement is required, you can use the following fuses:
• 8 A, 250 V fuse
– Wickmann 19 194-8 A
– Schurter SP001.013
– Littlefuse 217.008
• Fuse holder
– Wickmann 19 653

:DUQLQJ
Improper handling of digital output modules could result in injury or damage
to property.
Under the covers on the right side of the module, there are dangerous
voltages > 25 VAC or > 60 VDC.
Before opening these covers, ensure that the front connector of the module
is removed or that the module is disconnected from the supply voltage.

:DUQLQJ
Improper handling of front connectors could result in injury or damage to
property.
When you remove the front connector during operation, beware of
dangerous live voltage > 25 VAC or > 60 VDC across the pins.
If the front connector is wired to such voltages, hot swapping of modules
must always be carried out by skilled or instructed electrical staff, in order to
avoid unintentional contact with the module pins.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 10-9
0DLQWHQDQFH

3RVLWLRQRIWKH)XVHV
Digital output modules are equipped with 1 fuse per channel group. The fuses are
located at the left side of the digital output module. The figure below shows you the
location of the fuses on digital output modules.

1
1

Figure 10-5 Location of fuses in the digital output module 120/230 VAC

5HSODFLQJIXVHV
The fuses are located at the left side of the module. Replace the fuses as follows:
1. Switch the CPU to STOP.
2. Switch off the load voltage of the digital output module.
3. Remove the front connector from the digital output module.
4. Loosen the fixing screw of the digital output module.
5. Swing out the digital output module.
6. Remove the fuse holder from the digital output module ).
7. Replace the fuse.
8. Screw the fuse holder back into the digital output module.
9. Reinstall the digital output module.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
10-10 A5E00105492-03


7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 ,QWKLV&KDSWHU

,QWURGXFWLRQ
This Chapter helps you to get acquainted with tools you can use to carry out the
following tasks:
• Hardware/software error diagnostics.
• Elimination of hardware/software errors.
• Testing the hardware/software - for example, during commissioning.

1RWH
It would go beyond the scope of this manual to provide detailed descriptions of all
the tools you can use for diagnostics, testing and troubleshooting functions.
Further notes are found in the relevant hardware/software manuals.

 2YHUYLHZ7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV

6RIWZDUHWHVWLQJIXQFWLRQV0RQLWRULQJDQGPRGLI\LQJRIYDULDEOHVVLQJOHVWHS
PRGH
STEP 7 offers you the following testing functions you can also use for diagnostics:
• Monitoring and modifying of variables
Can be used for PG/PC monitoring of specific CPU or user program variables.
You can also declare permanent values for the variables.
• Testing with program status
You can test your program by viewing the program status of each function
(result of logical links, status bit) or the data of specific registers in real-time
mode.
For example, if you have selected the programming language LAD in STEP 7
for your presentation, the color of the symbol will indicate a closed switch or an
active circuit.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-1
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

1RWH
The STEP 7 testing function with program status extends the CPU cycle time!
In STEP 7 you can customize the maximum permitted increase in cycle time
(not for CPU 318-2 DP). In this case, set process mode for the CPU parameters
in STEP 7.

• Single-step mode
When testing in single-step mode, you can process your program instructions in
sequence (= single-step) and set break points. This is only possible in testing
mode and not in process mode.

7HVWLQJIXQFWLRQVRIWKHVRIWZDUH)RUFLQJYDULDEOHV
The Force function can be used to declare permanent values in specific variables
of a user program or CPU (also: inputs and outputs) which cannot be overwritten
subsequently by the user program.
For example, you can use it to jumper sensors or switch outputs permanently,
irrespective of the user program.

'DQJHU
This could result in severe injury or even death, and damage to property.
Incorrect use of the Force function could result in death or severe injury, and
damage to machinery or even the entire plant.
Always follow the safety instructions in the 67(3PDQXDOV.

'DQJHU
)RUFLQJZLWK6&38V
The force values in the process image of the LQSXWVcan overwritten by write
commands (such as T IB x, = I x.y, Copy with SFC, etc.) and by read I/O
commands (such as L PIW x) in the user program, or by write PG/OP functions! 
2XWSXWV initialized with forced values only return the forced value if not accessed
by the user program via peripheral write instructions (e.g. TPQB x) or by PG/OP
write functions!
Always ensure that forced values in the I/O process image cannot be overwritten
by the user program or PG/OP functions!

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-2 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

With S7-300 CPUs, forcing is the same as "cyclical modify"

Execute force Execute force

job for inputs job for inputs

PIQ PII PIQ PII

Besy User program Besy
transfer transfer transfer transfer

Forced value
overwritten by
Forced value T PQW! Forced value

Execute force T PQW Execute force

job for outputs job for outputs

OS: operating system execution

Figure 11-1 Principle of forcing in S7-300 CPUs

7KHGLIIHUHQFHVEHWZHHQIRUFLQJDQGPRGLI\LQJYDULDEOHV

Table 11-1 The differences between forcing and modifying variables

&KDUDFWHULVWLFVIXQFWLRQ )RUFLQJ 0RGLI\LQJ9DULDEOHV

Memory bit (M) - Yes
Timers and counters (T, C) - Yes
Data Blocks (DB) - Yes
Inputs and outputs (I, Q) Yes Yes
Peripheral Inputs (PI) - -
Peripheral Outputs (PO) - Yes
User program can overwrite modify/force Yes Yes
values
Maximum number of force values 10 -

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Details on test functions of the software are found in the 67(32QOLQH+HOS and
in the 67(33URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-3
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 2YHUYLHZ'LDJQRVWLFV

,QWURGXFWLRQ
System errors can occur especially in the &RPPLVVLRQLQJ phase. Tracking these
errors might be a time-consuming effort, since they can occur likewise on hardware
and on software side. Here, the multitude of testing functions ensures
commissioning without problems.

1RWH
Faults GXULQJRSHUDWLRQ are almost always caused by hardware errors or damage.

7\SHVRIHUURU
Errors the S7 CPUs can recognize and to which you can react with the help of
organization blocks (OBs) can be split into the following two categories:
• Synchronous errors: Errors you can relate to a specific point in the user
program (e.g. error when accessing a peripheral module).
• Asynchronous errors: Errors you can QRW relate to a specific point in the user
program (e.g. cycle time exceeded, module error).

(UURU+DQGOLQJ
Programming with foresight and, above all, knowledge and proper handling of
diagnostic tools puts you into an advantageous position in error situations:
• You can reduce the effects of errors.
• It makes it easier for you to locate errors (e.g. by programming error OBs).
• You can limit downtimes.

'LDJQRVWLFVZLWK/('GLVSOD\
SIMATIC S7 hardware offers diagnostics with LEDs.
These LEDs are implemented in three colors:
• Green LEDs report regular operation (e.g. supply voltage is applied).
• Yellow LEDs indicate special operating states (e.g. "Force" is active).
• Red LEDs report errors (e.g. bus error)
A flashing LED also indicates a special event (e.g. memory reset).

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Notes on diagnostics with LEDs are found in the Chapter below.
Notes on diagnostics of I/O modules capable of diagnostics are found in the
relevant Manual.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-4 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFEXIIHU
If an error occurs, the CPU writes the cause of error to the diagnostic buffer. In
67(3 you can read the diagnostic buffer with your PG. This location holds error
information in plain text.
Other modules capable of diagnostics can be equipped with their own diagnostic
buffer. In 67(3(HW Config > Hardware diagnostics) you can read out his buffer
on your PG.
Diagnosable modules without diagnostic buffer write their error information to the
CPU's diagnostic buffer.
When an error or an interrupt event occurs, (e.g. time-of-day interrupt), the CPU
switches to STOP mode, or you can react in the user program via error/interrupt
OBs. This would be OB82 in the above example.

'LDJQRVWLFVZLWKV\VWHPIXQFWLRQV
If the following CPUs are used, we recommend that you use the more user-friendly
SFB 54 RALRM (called in diagnostic OB82) to evaluate the diagnostics from
centralized or distributed modules or DP slaves:
• CPU 31xC, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 312, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 314, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 315-2 DP, FW Version V 2.0.0 and higher
• CPU 317-2 DP, FW Version V 2.1.0 and higher
Further options for diagnostics with system functions are listed below:
• Using SFC 51 "RDSYSST" to read an SSL partial list or an extract thereof.
• Reading the diagnostic data (Slave diagnostics) of a DP slave, using SFC 13
"DPNRM_DG"
Every DP slave provides slave diagnostic data according to EN 50 170 Volume
2, PROFIBUS. You can use SFC 13 DPNRM_DG" to read these diagnostic
data. Error information is stored in hex code. Refer to the relevant module
manual for information on the meaning of the read code.
For example, the entry of the value 50H (= dual 0101 0000) in byte 7 of the
slave diagnostics for the distributed I/O module ET 200B indicates a faulty fuse
or missing load voltage in channel group 2 and 3.
• Reading a data record with SFC 59 "RD_REC"
You can use SFC 59 "RD_REC" (read record) to read a specific data record
from the addressed module. Data records 0 and 1 are especially suitable for
reading diagnostic information from a diagnosable module.
Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of
a signal module. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data also
stored in data record 0, plus module-specific diagnostic data.
• Reading out the start information of the current OB, using SFC 6 "RD_SINFO"
Error information is also found in the start information of the relevant error OB.
You can use SFC 6 "RD_SINFO" (read start information) to read the start
information of the OB that was last called and not yet processed completely,
and of the start-up OB that was last called.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-5
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 'LDJQRVWLFRSWLRQVZLWK67(3

7KH+DUGZDUHGLDJQRVWLFVIXQFWLRQ
Locate the cause of a module error by viewing the online information on the
module. You can locate the cause of an error in the user program cycle with the
help of the diagnostic buffer and of the stack content. You can also check whether
a user program will run on a specific CPU.
Hardware diagnostics give you an overview of the PLC status. In an overview
symbols can display the error status of every module. A double-click on the faulty
module opens detailed error information. The scope of this information depends on
the specific module. You can view the following information:
• Display of general information on the module (e.g. order No., version,
designation) and module status (e.g. error).
• Display of module errors (e.g. channel error) in the central I/O and DP slave.
• Display of messages from the diagnostic buffer.
For CPUs you can also view the following module status information:
• Cause of an error in the user program cycle.
• Display of the cycle time (longest, shortest and last cycle).
• Options and utilization of MPI communication.
• Display of performance data (number of possible /IOs, memory bits, counters,
timers and blocks).
Details on diagnostic options in STEP 7 and procedures are found in the
3URJUDPPLQJZLWK67(3 Manual and in the +:&RQILJ2QOLQH+HOS.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-6 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 'LDJQRVWLFVZLWK/('V

,QWURGXFWLRQ
Diagnostics with LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. Usually you evaluate
the diagnostic buffer for further error localization.
The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has occurred. For
example, the number of the appropriate error OB is located there. If you generate
this information, you can prevent the CPU from switching to STOP mode.

)RUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQRQVWDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V
see the 6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\V section of the appropriate &38'DWDReference
Manual.

6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\VRIDOO&38V
Table 11-2 Status and error displays
/(' 'HVFULSWLRQ
6) 9'& )5&( 581 6723 
PRGH
LED LED LED LED off LED off CPU power supply missing.
off off off Remedy:
Check whether the power supply module is connected to
mains and switched on.
Check whether the CPU is connected to the power supply
module and switched on.
LED On X (see LED off On The CPU is in STOP mode.
off the Remedy: Start the CPU.
descri
ption)
On On X LED off On The CPU is in STOP mode as a result of error.
Remedy: refer to the tables below, evaluate the SF LED
X On X LED off Flashes The CPU requests memory reset.
(0.5 Hz)
X On X LED off Flashes The CPU executes memory reset.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes On The CPU is in start-up mode.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes On The CPU was halted by a programmed break point.
(0.5 Hz) For details refer to the Programming Manual 3URJUDPPLQJ
ZLWK67(3.
On On X X X Hardware or software error
Remedy: refer to the tables below, evaluate the SF LED
X X On X X You have activated the Force function
For details refer to the Programming Manual 3URJUDPPLQJ
ZLWK67(3.

'HVFULSWLRQRIVWDWXV;
This status has no effect on the current CPU function.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-7
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

Table 11-3 Evaluation of the SF LED (software error)

3RVVLEOH(UURUV UHVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

TOD interrupt is enabled and Calls OB85. CPU Load OB 10 (OB number is
triggered. However, a does not STOP if apparent from the diagnostic
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. buffer).
loaded.
(Software/configuration
error)
Start time of the enabled Calls OB80. CPU Disable the TOD interrupt before
TOD interrupt was jumped, does not STOP if you set the time-of-day with SFC
e.g. by advancing the OB80 is loaded. 29.
internal clock.
Delay interrupt triggered by Calls OB85. CPU Load OB20 or OB21 (CPU 317-2
SFC 32. However, a does not STOP if DP only) (OB number is apparent
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. from diagnostic buffer).
loaded.
(Software/configuration
error)
Process interrupt is enabled Calls OB85. CPU Load OB40 (OB number is
and triggered. However, a does not STOP if apparent from the diagnostic
matching block is not OB85 is loaded. buffer).
loaded.
(Software/configuration
error)
Status alarm is generated, Calls OB85. CPU Load OB55
but the appropriate OB55 is does not STOP if
not loaded. OB85 is loaded.
Update alarm is generated, Calls OB85. CPU Load OB56
but the appropriate OB 56 is does not STOP if
not loaded. OB85 is loaded.
Vendor-specific alarm is Calls OB85. CPU Load OB57
generated, but the does not STOP if
appropriate OB57 is not OB85 is loaded.
loaded.
Attempt to access a missing Calls OB85. CPU Generate OB 85, the start
or faulty module. (Software does not STOP if information of the OB contains the
or hardware error) OB85 is loaded or, if address of the relevant module.
OB80 is loaded, the Replace the relevant module or
cycle time is eliminate the program error.
exceeded a second
time without being
triggered again.
The cycle time was Calls OB80. CPU Extension of the cycle time
exceeded. Probably too does not STOP if it is (STEP 7 - Hardware configuration),
many interrupt OBs called OB80 is loaded or changing the program structure.
simultaneously. called for a second Remedy: if required, retrigger cycle
time. time monitoring via SFC 43

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-8 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

3RVVLEOH(UURUV UHVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

Programming error Calls OB121. CPU Eliminate the programming error.
• Block not loaded does not STOP if The STEP 7 testing function helps
OB121 is loaded. you to locate the error.
• Wrong block number
• Wrong timer/counter
number
• Read/write access to
wrong area
• Etc.
I/O access error Calls OB122. CPU Check module addressing in HW
An error has occurred when does not STOP if Config or whether a module/DP
module data was accessed OB122 is loaded. slave has failed.

Global data communication Calls OB87. CPU Check global data communication
error, e.g. insufficient length does not STOP if in STEP 7. If required, correct the
of the DB for global data OB87 is loaded. DB size.
communication.

Table 11-4 Evaluation of the SF LED (hardware error)

3RVVLEOH(UURUV UHVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

A module was removed or CPU goes into STOP Screw-tighten the modules and
inserted during operation. restart the CPU.
A diagnosable module Calls OB82. CPU response to the diagnostic event,
reports a diagnostic does not STOP if depending on the module's
interrupt. OB82 is loaded. configuration.
Attempt to access a missing Call of OB85, if Generate OB85, the start
or faulty module. Loose access was attempted information of the OB contains the
connector (Software or during update of the address of the relevant module.
hardware error). process image (here, Replace the relevant module,
the OB85 call must be tighten the plug or eliminate the
enabled accordingly in program error.
the parameters). Call
of OB122 with direct
I/O access. CPU
switches to STOP if
the OB is not loaded.
MMC is defective. The CPU goes into Replace MMC, reset CPU
STOP mode and memory, retransfer program, and
requests memory change CPU to RUN mode.
reset.

Tip: You can use SFC 39 to disable all interrupts and asynchronous error events.
Tip on OB32 and OB35: You can set the times in watchdog OB32 and OB35,
starting from 1 ms.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-9
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

1RWH
The shorter the selected watchdog interrupt period, the more likely it is that
watchdog interrupt errors will occur. You must take into account the operating
system times of the CPU in question, the user program runtime and extension of
the cycle time by active PG functions, for example.

&URVVUHIHUHQFH
Details on the OBs and on SFCs required for their evaluation can be found in the
67(32QOLQH+HOS and in the Manual 6\VWHP6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHP
DQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV.

6WDWXVDQGHUURUGLVSOD\RI'3FRPSOLDQW&38V

Table 11-5 The BUSF, BUSF1 and BUSF2 LEDs

/(' 'HVFULSWLRQ
6) 9'& %86) %86) %86) 
On On On/ - - PROFIBUS DP interface error.
flashe Remedy: Refer to the table below
s
On On - On/ X Error at the first PROFIBUS DP interface of CPU 317-2
flashes DP.
Remedy: Refer to the table below
On On - X On/flash Error at the second PROFIBUS DP interface of CPU 317-2
es DP.
Remedy: Refer to the table below

Description of status X:
The LED can assume the status On or Off, but this status has no effect on the
current CPU function. For example, the states Force On or Off do not influence the
STOP status of the CPU

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-10 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

Table 11-6 The BUSF LED lights up.

3RVVLEOH(UURUV 5HVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

• Bus fault (hardware fault). Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN • Check the bus cable for short
• DP interface error. mode). CPU switches to STOP if or interruption.
OB86 is not loaded. • Evaluate the diagnostic data.
• Different transmission rates in
multiple DP master mode. Reconfigure, or correct the
configuration.
• If the DP slave interface is
active or there is a bus short-
circuit on the master.
• For a passive DP slave
interface: baud rate search,
i.e. there are currently no
other active nodes on the bus
(e.g. a master)

Table 11-7 The BUSF LED flashes

3RVVLEOH(UURUV UHVSRQVHRIWKH&38 5HPHGLHV

The CPU is the DP master/active Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN Ensure that the bus cable is
slave: mode). CPU switches to STOP if connected to the CPU and that
• Failure of a connected station OB86 is not loaded. the bus is not interrupted.

• At least one of the configured Wait until the CPU has started. If
slaves cannot be accessed. the LED does not stop flashing,
check the DP slaves or evaluate
• Incorrect configuration the diagnostic data for the DP
slaves.
The CPU is the DP slave Calls OB86 (when CPU is in RUN • Check the CPU.
CPU 31x was programmed mode). • Check to make sure that the
incorrectly. Possible causes: CPU switches to STOP if OB86 is bus connector is properly
• The response monitoring time not loaded. inserted.
has expired. • Check for interruptions in the
• PROFIBUS DP bus cable to the DP master.
communication is interrupted. • Check configuration data and
• Wrong PROFIBUS address. the parameters.

• Incorrect configuration

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-11
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 'LDJQRVWLFVRI'3&38V

 'LDJQRVWLFVRI'3&38V2SHUDWLQJDV'30DVWHU

'LDJQRVWLFVHYDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The figure below illustrates the procedure for evaluating the diagnostics in the user
program.

Diagnostic event

OB82 is called

Evaluation with Evaluation with SFB54

SFC13 or SFC51 (simplest method)

Read out OB82_MDL_ADDR and For the diagnostics of the affected components:
OB82_IO_FLAG
(=Identification I/O module) Call SFB54

MODE=1 set.
Bit 0 of OB82_IO_FLAG entered Diagnostic data is entered into the TINFO
as bit 15 in OB82_MDL_ADDR. and AINFO parameters
Result: diagnostic address
"OB82_MDL_ADDR*"

For the diagnostics of the For the diagnostics of the affected modules:
entire DP slave: Call SFC 51

Call SFC13 Enter the diagnostic address

"OB82_MDL_ADDR*" into the INDEX parameter.
Enter the diagnostic address
"OB82_MDL_ADDR*" into Enter ID W#16#00B3 (= diagnostic data of a
the LADDR parameter. module) into the SZL_ID parameter.

Note:
SFC 13 is asynchronous, i. e. it can be
called several times until it enters the
BUSY mode = 0.

First call into OB82,

finish processing in the cycle.

Figure 11-2 Diagnostics with CPU 31x-2

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-12 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV
With CPU 31x-2 you assign diagnostic addresses for the PROFIBUS DP. Make DP
diagnostic addresses are assigned to the DP master and to the DP slave sure
during configuration.

CPU as DP master CPU as DP slave

PROFIBUS DP

During configuration you must specify three diagnostic addresses:

• Slave diagnostic address DP interface diagnostic address

(from the master) (from the slave)
• Slot 2 Diagnostic Address
of the Slave (from the master)

Figure 11-3 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves

&RQILJXUDWLRQRI'30DVWHU &RQILJXUDWLRQRI'36ODYH
 
During configuration of the DP master, you During configuration of the DP slave, you
assign two different diagnostic addresses for also specify a diagnostic address assigned
an I-slave: one diagnostic address for Slot 0 to the DP slave (in the associated project of
and one diagnostic address for Slot 2. The the DP slave).
two addresses have the following functions: Hereinafter, this diagnostic address is
• The diagnostic address for slot 0 reports referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3VODYH.
in the master all events relating to the This diagnostic addresses is used by the DP
complete slave (station representative), slave to obtain information on the status of
e.g. station failure. the DP master or a bus interruption.
• The diagnostic address for slot 2 is used
to report events that affect this slot. For
example, if the CPU is acting as an
intelligent slave, it returns the diagnostic
interrupts for operating state transitions.
Hereinafter, these diagnostic addresses are
referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3PDVWHU.
These diagnostic addresses are used by the
DP master to obtain information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus interruption.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-13
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how CPU 31x-2 operating as DP master recognizes
operating mode transitions of a CPU operating as DP slave or data exchange
interruptions.

Table 11-8 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 as the DP master

(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3VODYH"
Bus failure interrupt • Calls OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH(incoming
(short-circuit, event; diagnostic address of Slot 0 of the DP slave that is
connector unplugged) assigned to the DP master)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122 (I/O access error)
DP slave: RUN → • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU
STOP (incoming event; diagnostic address of Slot 2 of the DP slave
that is assigned to the DP master; Variable
OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: STOP → • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.
RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of Slot 2 of the DP slave
that is assigned to the DP master; Variable
OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

(YDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The table below shows how you can, for example, evaluate RUN to STOP
transitions of the DP slave in the DP master.

Table 11-9 Evaluation in the DP master of RUN to STOP transitions by the DP slave

,QWKH'3PDVWHU ,QWKH'3VODYH&38['3

Diagnostic addresses: (Example) Diagnostic addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostic address = Slave diagnostic address =
Slave diagnostic address = Master diagnostic address = irrelevant
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2"=
(Slot 2 of slave)
The CPU calls OB82 with the following ← CPU: RUN -> STOP
information: The CPU generates a DP slave
• OB82_MDL_ADDR:= diagnostics message frame
• OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39 (incoming
event)
• OB82_MDL_DEFECT: = Module error
Tip: The CPU diagnostic buffer also contains
this information
In the user program you should also include
SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG" for reading out DP
slave diagnostic data.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-14 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 5HDGLQJVODYHGLDJQRVWLFGDWD

The slave diagnostic data is compliant with EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Depending on the DP master, diagnostic data for all DP slaves conforming to
standard can be read with 67(3.

'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHVZLWKGLUHFWGDWDH[FKDQJH
You assign a diagnostic address to the receiving station when directly exchanging
data:

CPU 31x-2 as sender CPU 31x-2 as receiver

PROFIBUS

Diagnostic address

Figure 11-4 Diagnostic address for the receiving station with direct data exchange

The figure illustrates how you specify a diagnostic address assigned to the receiver
in the receiver during configuration. This diagnostic addresses is used by the
receiver to obtain information on the status of the sender or a bus interruption.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-15
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

5HDGLQJRXWWKHGLDJQRVWLFGDWD
The table below shows you how the various DP master systems can read
diagnostic information from a slave.

Table 11-10 Reading the diagnostic information using STEP 5 and STEP 7 in the masters system

3/&ZLWK'3PDVWHU %ORFNVRUUHJLVWHUVLQ $SSOLFDWLRQ )XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ

67(3
SIMATIC S7/M7 “DP slave diagnostics” Displaying slave Found under the
register diagnostic data as plain keyword +DUGZDUH
text on a STEP 7 user GLDJQRVWLFV in the STEP
interface 7 Online Help and in the
3URJUDPPLQJ67(3
Manual
SFC 13 “DP NRM_DG” Reading slave 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
diagnostic data )XQFWLRQVReference
(stored in the data area Manual
of the user program)
SFC 51 “RDSYSST” Reading SSL sublists. In 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
the diagnostic interrupt, )XQFWLRQVReference
call SFC 51 with the Manual
system status list ID
W#16#00B4 and read
out the SSL of the slave
CPU.
SFB 54 "RALRM" Reading additional 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
interrupt information )XQFWLRQVReference
from a DP slave or a Manual
centralized module from
the relevant OB.
SFC 59 “RD_REC” Reading data records of 6\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG
the S7 diagnosis (stored )XQFWLRQVReference
in the data area of the Manual
user program)
FB 125/FC 125 Evaluating slave On the Internet URL
diagnostic data http://www.ad.siemens.d
e/simatic-cs, Article ID
387 257
SIMATIC S5 with IM FB 192 “IM308C” Reading slave Manual 'LVWULEXWHG,2
308-C operating as DP diagnostic data (stored 6\VWHP(7
master in the data area of the
user program)
SIMATIC S5 with S5- FB 230 “S_DIAG”
95U PLC operating as
DP master

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-16 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

([DPSOHRIUHDGLQJVODYHGLDJQRVWLFGDWDXVLQJ)%,0&
Here you will find an example of how to use FB192 to read out DP slave
diagnostic data in the 192 67(3 user program.

$VVXPSWLRQVUHJDUGLQJWKH67(3XVHUSURJUDP
For this 67(3 user program it is assumed that:
• The IM 308-C operating as DP master uses page frame 0 to 15 (number 0 of IM
308-C).
• The DP slave has the PROFIBUS address 3.
• Slave diagnostics data should be stored in DB 20. Here you can also use any
other data block.
• Slave diagnostic data has a length of 26 bytes.

67(3XVHUSURJUDP

67/ 'HVFULSWLRQ
:A DB 30
:SPA FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800 Default address area of IM 308-C
IMST : KY 0, 3 //IM no. = 0, PROFIBUS address of the DP slave = 3
FCT : KC SD //Function: Read slave diagnosis
GCGR : KM 0 //not evaluated
TYP : KY 0, 20 //S5 data area: DB 20
STAD : KF +1 //Diagnostic data as of data word 1
LENG : KF 26 //Length of diagnostic data = 26 bytes
ERR : DW 0 //Error code storage in DW 0 of DB 30

([DPSOHRIUHDGLQJRXW6GLDJQRVWLFGDWDZLWK6)&³5'5(&´
Here you will find an example of how to use SFC 59 in the 67(3 user program
to read S7 diagnostics data records for a DP slave. The process of reading the
slave diagnostics is similar to SFC 13.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-17
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

$VVXPSWLRQVUHJDUGLQJWKH67(3XVHUSURJUDP
For this 67(3 user program it is assumed that:
• Diagnostic data for the input module at address 200H is to be read.
• Data record 1 is to be read out.
• Data record 1 is to be stored in DB 10.

67(3XVHUSURJUDP

67/ 'HVFULSWLRQ
CALL SFC 59

REQ :=TRUE //Request to read

IOID :=B#16#54 //Identifier of the address area, here the I/O input
LADDR:= W#16#200 //Logical address of the module
RECNUM :=B#16#1 //Data record 1 is to be read
RET_VAL :=MW2 //An error code is output if an error occurs
BUSY :=MO.0 //Read operation not finished
RECORD :=P# DB10.DBX 0.0 BYTE 240 //DB 10 is target area for the read data record 1

1RWH
Data is only returned to the target area if BUSY is reset to 0 and if no negative
RET_VAL has occurred.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-18 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVVHV
With CPU 31x-2 you assign diagnostic addresses for the PROFIBUS DP. Make DP
diagnostic addresses are assigned to the DP master and to the DP slave sure
during configuration.

CPU as DP master CPU as DP slave

PROFIBUS DP

During configuration you must specify three diagnostic addresses:

• Slave diagnostic address DP interface diagnostic address

(from the master) (from the slave)
• Slot 2 Diagnostic Address
of the Slave (from the master)

Figure 11-5 Diagnostic addresses for DP masters and DP slaves

&RQILJXUDWLRQRI'30DVWHU &RQILJXUDWLRQRI'36ODYH
During configuration of the DP master, you During configuration of the DP slave, you
assign two different diagnostic addresses for also specify a diagnostic address assigned
an I-slave: one diagnostic address for Slot 0 to the DP slave (in the associated project of
and one diagnostic address for Slot 2. The the DP slave).
two addresses have the following functions: Hereinafter, this diagnostic address is
• The diagnostic address for slot 0 reports referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3VODYH.
in the master all events relating to the This diagnostic addresses is used by the DP
complete slave (station representative), slave to obtain information on the status of
e.g. station failure. the DP master or a bus interruption.
• The diagnostic address for slot 2 is used
to report events that affect this slot. For
example, if the CPU is acting as an
intelligent slave, it returns the diagnostic
interrupts for operating state transitions.
Hereinafter, these diagnostic addresses are
referred to as DVVLJQHGWRWKH'3PDVWHU.
These diagnostic addresses are used by the
DP master to obtain information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus interruption.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-19
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

(YHQWUHFRJQLWLRQ
The table below shows how CPU 31x-2 operating as DP slave recognized
operating state transitions or data exchange interruptions.

Table 11-11 Event recognition by CPUs 31x-2 acting as the DP slave

(YHQW :KDWKDSSHQVLQWKH'3VODYH"
Bus failure interrupt (short- • Calls OB86 with the message 6WDWLRQIDLOXUH(incoming
circuit, connector unplugged) event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave)
• with I/O access: Call of OB122 (I/O access error)
DP master: RUN → STOP • Calls OB82 with the message 0RGXOHHUURU(incoming
event; diagnostic address of the DP slave assigned to
the DP slave; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP master: STOP → RUN • Call of OB82 with the message 0RGXOH2.(outgoing
event; diagnostic address of the DP slave, assigned to
the DP slave; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

(YDOXDWLRQLQWKHXVHUSURJUDP
The table below shows you how you can, for example, evaluate RUN-STOP
transitions of the DP master in the DP slave (see also the previous table).

Table 11-12 Evaluation of RUN to STOP transitions in the DP master/DP slave

,QWKH'3PDVWHU ,QWKH'3VODYH
Diagnostic addresses: (Example) Diagnostic addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostic address = Slave diagnostic address =
Slave diagnostic address in the master Master diagnostic address = irrelevant
system=
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2"=
(Slot 2 of slave)
CPU: RUN " STOP → The CPU calls OB82 with the following
information:
• OB82_MDL_ADDR:=422
• OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39 (incoming
event)
• OB82_MDL_DEFECT: = Module error
Tip: The CPU diagnostic buffer also
contains this information

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-20 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 ,QWHUUXSWVRQWKH'30DVWHU

,QWHUUXSWVZLWK6'3PDVWHU
3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWVE\,6ODYHZLWK6)&
If the CPU 31x-2 is used as the DP slave, you can trigger a process interrupt on
the DP master from the user program.
When you call SFC 7 “DP_PRAL”, you trigger an OB40 in the user program on the
DP master. The SFC 7 allows you to forward interrupt information to the DP master
in a double word. This information can then be evaluated in the
OB40_POINT_ADDR variable in the OB40. The interrupt information can be freely
programmed as required. The 6\VWHP6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG
6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV - Reference Manual contains a detailed description of SFC 7
“DP_PRAL”.
6HWWLQJXVHUGHILQHGLQWHUUXSWVE\,6ODYHVZLWKWKH6)%
In the CPU 31x-2 operated as a DP slave, you can trigger user-defined interrupts
from the DP master from the user program. SFB 75 "SALRM" is used to send a
process or diagnostic interrupt from a slot in the transfer area (virtual slot) to the
associated DP master from the user program on an intelligent slave. This starts the
associated OB on the DP master.
Interrupt-specific additional information may be sent at the same time. You can
read all this additional information in the DP master using SFB 54 "RALRM".

,QWHUUXSWVZLWKDQRWKHU'3PDVWHU
When CPU 31x-2 operates with another DP master, an image of these interrupts is
created in the device-specific diagnostic data of CPU 31x-2. You must post-
process the relevant diagnostic events in the DP master's user program.

1RWH
Before you can evaluate diagnostic and process interrupts using the device-
specific diagnostics function on another DP master, you must make sure that:

The DP master is able to store the diagnostic messages, i.e. the diagnostic
messages should be stored in a ring buffer on the DP master. For example, if the
DP master can not store diagnostic messages, only the last incoming diagnostic
message would be stored.

In your user program, you must query the relevant bits in device-specific diagnostic
data. Here you must take the PROFIBUS DP cycle time into account, for example,
to be able to query these bits at least once and in synchronism to bus cycle time.

With an IM 308-C operating as DP master you cannot utilize process interrupts in

device-specific diagnostics, because only incoming events are reported rather than
outgoing events.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-21
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

 6WUXFWXUHRIWKH6ODYH'LDJQRVWLF'DWDZKHQWKH&38LVXVHGDV
DQ,QWHOOLJHQW6ODYH

6WUXFWXUHRIWKHGLDJQRVWLFVPHVVDJHIUDPH
The figure below shows the structure of the diagnostics message frame for slave
diagnostics.

Byte 0
Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3
Byte 2

Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address

Byte 4 High byte

Manufacturer ID
Byte 5 Low byte

Byte 6 Module diagnostics

.
to (length depends on the number of the
. configured areas of the intermediate
Byte x-1
. memory 1 )

Byte x Modul status (device-specific diagnostics)

to .
(length depends on the number
Byte y-1
. of the configured address areas)
.

Byte y Interrupt status (device-specific diagnostics)

to .
(length depends on interrupt type)
Byte z
.
.

1 Exception: if the DP master is wrongly configured,

the DP slave will interprete 35 configured address areas
(46H in byte 6)

Figure 11-6 Structure of slave diagnostic data

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-22 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

6WDWLRQVWDWXV

Table 11-13 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)

%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ 5HPHG\

0  DP slave cannot be addressed by DP master. • Is the correct DP address set on the DP
slave?
• Is the bus connector in place?
• Does the DP slave have power?
• Correct configuration of the RS485
Repeater?
• Perform a reset on the DP slave.
1  DP slave is not ready for data exchange. • Wait for the slave to complete start-up.
2 Configuration data sent by DP master to the DP • Was the software set for the correct
slave is inconsistent with slave configuration. station type or DP slave configuration?
3 Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a RUN to • You can read the diagnostic data.
STOP transition on the CPU or by the SFB 75
Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a STOP to
RUN transition on the CPU or by the SFB 75
4  Function not supported; e.g. changing the DP • Check configuration data.
address at software level
5  This bit is always “0”. • -
6  DP slave type inconsistent with software • Was the software set for the right station
configuration. type? (parameter assignment error)
7 DP slave was configured by a DP master other • The bit is always 1 if, for example, you are
than the master currently accessing the slave. currently accessing the DP slave via PG or
a different DP master.
The configuring master's DP address is
located in the ”Master PROFIBUS address”
diagnostics byte.

6WDWLRQ6WDWXV

Table 11-14 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1)

%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0  The DP slave requires new parameters and configuration.
1  A diagnostic message was received. The DP slave cannot resume operation until the error
has been cleared (static diagnostic message).
2 This bit is always ”1” if a DP slave exists with this DP address.
3 The watchdog monitor is enabled on this DP slave.
4 DP slave has received control command "FREEZE".
5 DP slave has received control command "SYNC".
6  This bit is always "0".
7 DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been excluded from cyclic processing.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-23
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

6WDWLRQ6WDWXV

Table 11-15 Structure of station status 3 (byte 2)

%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 to 6 These bits are always “0”
7 The incoming diagnostic messages exceeds the memory capacity of the DP slave.
The DP master cannot write all diagnostic messages sent by the DP slave to its diagnostic
buffer.

0DVWHU352),%86DGGUHVV
The "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte stores the DP address of the DP
master:
• that has configured the DP slave and
• has read and write access to the DP slave.

Table 11-16 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address (byte 3)

%LW 'HVFULSWLRQ
0 to 7 DP address of the DP master that has configured the DP slave and has read/write access to
that DP slave.
FFH: DP slave was not configured by a DP master

YHQGRU,'
The vendor ID contains a code specifying the DP slave's type.

Table 11-17 Structure of the vendor ID (byte 4, 5)

%\WH %\WH 9HQGRU,'IRUWKH&38

80H EEH CPU 315-2 DP
80H F0H CPU 317-2 DP
80H D0H 313C-2-DP
80H D1H 314C-2-DP

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-24 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV
Module diagnostics indicate the configured address area of intermediate memory
that has received an entry.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 6 0 1

Length of the module diagnostics incl. byte 6

(dependent on the number of configured
address areas up to 6 byte)
Code for module diagnostics

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 7

Preset ≠ actual configuration

Preset ≠ actual configuration or Slave CPU in STOP
Preset ≠ actual configuration
Entry for 1st configured address area
Entry for 2nd configured address area
Entry for 3rd configured address area
Entry for 4th configured address area
Entry for 5th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 8

Entry for 6th to 13th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 9

Entry for 14th to 21st configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 10

Entry for 22nd to 29th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte 11 0 0 0 0 0

Entry for 30th configured address area

Entry for 31st configured address area
Entry for 32nd configured address area

Figure 11-7 Structure of the ID-specific diagnostics for CPU 31x-2

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-25
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

0RGXOHVWDWXV
The module status reflects the status of the configured address areas, and
provides detailed ID-specific diagnostics with respect to the configuration. Module
status starts with module diagnostics and consists of a maximum of 13 bytes.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x 0 0

Length of module status incl. byte x (max. 13 bytes)

Code for device-related diagnostics

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Status type: module status

2H = module status
Code for status message

Byte x+2 0H always "0"

Byte x+3 0H always "0"

7 6
Byte x+4 0 0 0 0

CPU slot
1st configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte x+5

2nd configured address area

3rd configured address area
00B: Module ok.;
4th configured address area
valid data
5th configured address area
01B: Module fault;
invalid data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (defective mode)
Byte x+6 10B: Wrong module:
invalid data
6th configured address area 11B: No module:
7th configured address area invalid data
8th configured address area
9th configured address area
.
.
.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte y-1 0 0

30th configured address area

31st configured address area
32nd configured address area

Figure 11-8 Structure of the module status

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-26 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

,QWHUUXSWVWDWXV
The interrupt status of module diagnostics provides details on a DP slave. The
maximum length of module diagnostics starting at byte y is 20 bytes.
The following figure describes the structure and content of the bytes for a
configured address area of intermediate memory.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y 0 0

Length of the device-related diagnostics incl. byte y

(max. 20 bytes)

Code for device-related diagnostics

Byte y +1 01H: Code for diagnostics interrupt

02H: Code for process interrupt

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y +2 Slot No.
2 = CPU
4...35 = No. of the configured address area
of the intermediate memory

Byte y +3 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 = No additional information

on diagnostic status
01 = Incoming diagnostics
(there is at least 1 error)
Only for
10 = Outgoing diagnostics
diagnostic
11 = Outgoing diagnostics,
interrupt
but there are still
Byte y +4 disturbances

to

Byte y +7 Diagnostics or interrupt data

.
.
.
Byte z

Example on byte y+2

CPU = 02H
1. Address area = 04H
2. Address area = 05H
etc.

Figure 11-9 Structure of the interrupt status

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-27
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDIRUDSURFHVVLQWHUUXSWIURPE\WH\
When a process interrupt occurs (code 02H for process interrupt in byte y+1), 4
bytes of interrupt information after byte y+4 are transferred. These 4 bytes were
transferred to the intelligent slave using SFC 7 "DP_PRAL“ or SFC 75 "SALRM“
when the process interrupt for the master was generated.

6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDZKHQDGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGLQ
UHVSRQVHWRDQRSHUDWLQJVWDWXVFKDQJHE\WKHLQWHOOLJHQWVODYHDIWHUE\WH\
Byte y+1 contains the code for a diagnostic interrupt (01H). The diagnostic data
contains the 16 bytes of status information from the CPU. The figure below shows
the allocation of the first four bytes of diagnostic data. The next 12 bytes are
always 0.
The data in these bytes corresponds to the contents of data record 0 of diagnostic
data in 67(3 (in this case, not all bits are used).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: Module o.k.
1: Module fault

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

Identifier for the intermediate

memory address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: Operating mode RUN

1: Operating mode STOP

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.
Byte y + 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Note: byte y + 8 to byte y + 19 are always 0.

Figure 11-10 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for a diagnostic interrupt (operating status change by intelligent slave)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-28 A5E00105492-03
 7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

6WUXFWXUHRIWKHLQWHUUXSWGDWDZKHQDGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGE\6)%
RQWKHLQWHOOLJHQWVODYHDIWHUE\WH\

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +4 0: Module o.k.
0
1: Module fault

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. Note the SFB 75 usage description

Byte y +5
Note that this diagnostic data has a
fixed meaning in the S7 context.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +6 You will find more information in the
STEP 7 Online Help or in the
Reference Manual System Software
for S7-300/400 System and Standard
Functions in the Diagnostic Data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. chapter.
Byte y +7

.
.
.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte y +19

Figure 11-11 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for the diagnostic interrupt (SFB 75)

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 11-29
7HVWLQJ)XQFWLRQV'LDJQRVWLFVDQG)DXOW(OLPLQDWLRQ

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
11-30 A5E00105492-03


$SSHQGL[

 $VVHPEO\

 *HQHUDO5XOHVDQG5HJXODWLRQVIRU62SHUDWLRQ

,QWURGXFWLRQ
In view of the many and versatile S7-300 applications, this chapter can only
describe the basic rules on its electrical configuration. You must observe at least
these basic rules if you want your S7-300 to operate free of trouble.

(0(5*(1&<2))GHYLFHV
EMERGENCY-OFF devices to IEC 204 (corresponds to VDE 113) must remain
effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.

6WDUWXSRIWKHV\VWHPDIWHUVSHFLILFHYHQWV
The following table shows you what you have to observe when starting up a plant
again following specific events.

Table 12-1 Starting the system after specific events

,IWKHUHLV :KDWPXVWQRWKDSSHQ
Restart following a voltage dip or power No dangerous operating states may occur. If
failure, necessary, force EMERGENCY-OFF.
Start-up after releasing the EMERGENCY An uncontrolled or undefined start-up must
OFF device: be avoided.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-1
$SSHQGL[

0DLQVYROWDJH
The following table shows you what to watch with respect to the mains voltage.

Table 12-2 Mains voltage

,QWKHFDVHRI LV
For stationary systems or systems without Installation of a mains disconnect switch or
all-pole mains disconnect switch a fuse in the building installation system.
For load power supplies, power supply The set rated voltage range must
modules correspond to the local power supply
voltage.
For all circuits of the S7-300 Rated mains voltage fluctuation/deviation
must lie within the permitted tolerance (refer
to Technical Data of S7-300 modules).

9'&3RZHU6XSSO\
The table below shows what you must observe in connection with the 24 VDC
power supply.

Table 12-3 Protection against external electrical interference

,QWKHFDVHRI 0HDVXUHVWRWDNH
Buildings External lightning Install lightning protection
protection (e.g. lightning conductors).
24 VDC power supply cables, Internal lightning
signal cables protection
24 VDC Power Supply Safe (electrical) extra-low voltage isolation

3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWH[WHUQDOHOHFWULFDOLQWHUIHUHQFH
The table below shows how you must protect your system against electrical
interference or faults.

Table 12-4 Protection against external electrical interference

,QWKHFDVHRI 0DNHVXUHWKDW
All plants or system with an S7-300 the plant or system is connected to a
installation protective conductor for the suppression of
electromagnetic interference.
Supply/signal/bus cables The conductor routing and installation is
correct.
Signal and bus cables a cable/conductor break does not result in
undefined plant or system states.

,QIRUPDWLRQRQ(0&DQGVXUJHSURWHFWLRQ
can be found in the following Chapters.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-2 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVW(OHFWURPDJQHWLF,QWHUIHUHQFH

 %DVLF3RLQWVIRU6\VWHP,QVWDOODWLRQV&RQIRUPLQJZLWK(0&
5HTXLUHPHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ(0&
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) describes the capability of electrical
equipment to operate free of errors in a given electromagnetic environment,
without being subject to external influence and without influencing external devices
in any way.

,QWURGXFWLRQ
Although your S7-300 and its components are developed for an industrial
environment and high electromagnetic compatibility, you should draw up an EMC
installation plan before you install the controller under consideration of all possible
interference sources.

3RVVLEOHHIIHFWVRILQWHUIHUHQFH
Electromagnetic noise can influence a PLC in various ways:
• Electromagnetic fields having a direct influence on the system
• Interference via bus signals (PROFIBUS DP etc.)
• Interference coupling via the system wiring
• Interference influencing the system via the power supply and/or protective
ground
The figure below shows the likely paths of electromagnetic interference.

Electromagnetic
fields

Bus signal PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM SM SM Process wiring

Protective earth Power supply module

Figure 12-1 Possible paths of electromagnetic interference

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-3
$SSHQGL[

&RXSOLQJPHFKDQLVPV
Depending on the emitting media (line or isolated) and the distance between the
interference source and the device, four different coupling mechanisms can
influence the PLC.

Table 12-5 Coupling mechanisms

&RXSOLQJ &DXVH 7\SLFDOLQWHUIHUHQFHVRXUFHV

PHFKDQLVPV
Electrical Galvanic or mechanical • Clocked devices (influence on the
coupling coupling always occurs when network due to converters and
two circuits use one common third-party power supply modules)
cable. • Starting motors
• Potential differences on component
enclosures with common power
supply
• Static discharge
Capacitive Capacitive or electrical • Interference coupling due to
coupling coupling occurs between parallel routing of signal cables
conductors connected to • Static discharge of the operator
different potentials.
• Contactors
The coupling effect is
proportional to voltage
change over time.
Inductive Inductive or magnetic • Transformers, motors, arc welding
coupling coupling occurs between two devices
current circuit loops. Current • Power supply cables routed in
flow in magnetic fields parallelism
induces interference voltages.
The coupling effect is • Switched cable current
proportional to current change • High-frequency signal cable
over time.
• Coils without suppression circuit
Radio frequency Radio frequency coupling • Neighboring transmitters (e.g. radio
coupling occurs when an phones)
electromagnetic wave • Sparking (sparkplugs, collectors of
reaches a conductor system. electrical motors, welding devices)
This wave coupling induces
currents and voltages.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-4 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 )LYH%DVLF5XOHVIRU(QVXULQJ(0&

,I\RXFRPSO\ZLWKWKHVHVILYHEDVLFUXOHV
you can ensure EMC in many cases!

5XOH/DUJHDUHDJURXQGLQJ
When you install the automation equipment, make sure that surfaces of inactive
metal parts are well bonded to chassis ground (see the following sections).
• Bond all passive metal parts to chassis ground, ensuring large area and low-
impedance contact.
• When using screw connections on varnished or anodized metal parts, support
contact with special contact washers or remove the protective insulating finish
on the points of contact.
• Wherever possible, avoid the use of aluminum parts for ground bonding.
Aluminum oxidizes very easily and is therefore less suitable for ground bonding.
• Create a central connection between chassis ground and the equipotential
grounded/protective conductor system.

5XOH3URSHUFDEOHURXWLQJ
Ensure proper cable routing when you wire your system (see the section below on
,QGRRURXWGRRUFDEOHURXWLQJ).
• Sort your wiring system into groups (high-voltage/power supply/signal/data
cables).
• Always route high-voltage, signal or data cables through separated ducts or in
separate bundles.
• Install the signal and data cables as close as possible to grounded surfaces
(e.g. supporting beans, metal rails, steel cabinet walls ).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-5
$SSHQGL[

5XOH0RXQWLQJWKHFDEOHVKLHOGLQJ

Take care that all cable shielding is properly fastened (refer to the section on
6KLHOGLQJRIFDEOHV).
• Always use shielded data cable. Always connect both ends of the shielding to
ground on a large area.
• Analog cables must always be shielded. For the transmission of low-amplitude
signals it might prove to be more efficient to have only one side of the shielding
connected to ground.
• Directly behind the cable entry in the cabinet or enclosure, terminate the
shielding on a large area of the shielding/protective ground bar and fasten it
with the help of a cable clamp. Then, route the cable to the module; however,
do not connect the shielding once again to ground in this place.
• Connections between the shielding/protective ground busbar and the
cabinet/enclosure must be of a low impedance.
• Always install shielded data cables in metal/metallized connector housings.

5XOH6SHFLDO(0&PHDVXUHV
Some special applications might require special EMC measures (refer to the
section on +RZWRSURWHFWGLJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOHVDJDLQVWLQGXFWLYHVXUJHYROWDJH).
• Connect anti-surge elements to all inductive devices not controlled by S7-300
modules.
• For cabinet or cubicle lighting in the immediate range of your controller, use
incandescent lamps or interference suppressed fluorescent lamps .

5XOH+RPRJHQHRXVUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
Create a homogeneous reference potential and ground electrical equipment
whenever possible (refer to the section on (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ).
• Route your equipotential conductors over a wide area if potential differences
exist or are expected between your system components.
• Make sure you carefully direct your grounding measures. Grounding measures
protect the controller and its functions.
Form a star circuit to connect the equipment in your system and the cabinets
containing central/expansion units to the grounding/protective conductor system.
This prevents the formation of ground loops.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-6 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

VHHDOVR
Grounding concept and overall structure
Shielding of cables
Outdoor cable routing
Cable Routing inside Buildings
EMC Compatible Installation of PLC

 (0&&RPSDWLEOH,QVWDOODWLRQRI3/&

,QWURGXFWLRQ
Quite often it is the case that interference suppression measures are not taken until
corruption of user signals is detected after the controller is actually in operation.
Frequently, the causes of such interference are found in inadequate reference
potentials as a result of faulty installation. This section shows you how to avoid
such errors.

,QDFWLYHPHWDOSDUWV
Inactive parts are referred to as electrically conductive elements, separated from
active elements by a basic insulating and only subject to electrical potential if an
error occurs.

,QVWDOODWLRQDQGJURXQGERQGLQJRILQDFWLYHPHWDOSDUWV
Bond all inactive metal parts to a large-surface ground when you install the S7-300.
Proper ground bonding ensures a homogeneous reference potential for the
controller and reduces the effect of interference coupling.
The ground connection establishes an electrically conductive interconnection of all
inactive parts. The sum of all interconnected inactive parts is referred to as chassis
ground.
This chassis ground must never develop a hazardous potential even if a fault
occurs. Therefore, chassis ground must be connected to the protective conductor
using cables with an adequate conductor cross-section. To avoid ground loops,
physically separate chassis ground elements (cabinets, parts of the building
construction or machine) must be bonded to the protective conductor system in a
star circuit.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-7
$SSHQGL[

2EVHUYHWKHIROORZLQJIRUJURXQGFRQQHFWLRQ
• In the same way as with active elements, exercise meticulous care to
interconnect inactive metal elements.
• Always make sure that you have a low-impedance interconnection between
metal elements (e.g. large and highly conductive contact surface).
• The protective insulating finish on varnished or anodized metal elements must
be pierced or removed. Use special contact washers or completely remove the
finish on the point of contact.
• Protect your connecting elements against corrosion (e.g. with a suitable grease)
• Interconnect moving chassis ground elements (e.g. cabinet doors) with flexible
ground straps. Always use short ground straps with a large surface (the surface
is decisive for the diversion of high-frequency currents).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-8 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 ([DPSOHVRIDQ(0&&RPSDWLEOH,QVWDOODWLRQ

,QWURGXFWLRQ
Below you can find two examples of an EMC compatible PLC installation.

6DPSOH(0&FRPSDWLEOHFDELQHWLQVWDOODWLRQ
The figure below shows a cabinet installation with the measures described above
(bonding of inactive metal parts to chassis ground and connecting the cable
shielding to ground). This sample applies only to grounded operation. Note the
points in the figure when you install your system.

2
1

4
5
6
7

Figure 12-2 Example of an EMC compatible cabinet installation

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-9
$SSHQGL[

.H\WRH[DPSOH
The numbers in the following list refer to the numbers in the figure above.

Table 12-6 Key to example 1

1R 'HVFULSWLRQ ([SODQDWLRQ

1 Ground straps If no large-surface metal-to-metal connections are available,
you must either interconnect inactive metal parts (e.g. cabinet
doors or mounting plates) or bond them to chassis ground using
ground straps. Use short ground straps with a large surface.
2 Supporting bars Interconnect the supporting bars on a large area to the cabinet
walls (metal-to-metal connection).
3 Mounting the rail The mounting bar and rack must be interconnected with large-
area metal-to-metal connections.
4 Signal cables Connect the shielding of signal cables on a large area of the
protective conductor/additional shielding busbar and fasten
them with cable clamps.
5 Cable clamp The cable clamp must cover a large area of the shielding braid
and ensure good contact.
6 Shielding busbar Interconnect the shielding busbar on a large surface with the
supporting bars (metal-to-metal connection). The cable
shielding is terminated on the busbar.
7 Protective Interconnect the protective conductor busbar on a large surface
conductor busbar with the supporting bars (metal-to-metal connection).
Interconnect the protective conductor busbar and the protective
ground system, using a separate cable (minimum cross-section
2
10 mm ).
8 Cable to the Interconnect the cable on a large area with the protective
protective ground ground system (equipotential ground).
system
(equipotential
ground)

([DPSOH(0&FRPSDWLEOHZDOOPRXQWLQJ
When operating your S7 in a low-noise environment that conform with permitted
ambient conditions (see Appendix $PELHQWFRQGLWLRQV), you can also mount your
S7 in frames or to the wall.
Interference coupling must be diverted to large metal surfaces. Therefore, always
mount standard profile/shielding/protective conductor rails on metal parts of the
construction. Steel sheet panels reference potential surfaces have been found
especially suitable for wall-mounting.
Provide a shielding busbar for connecting your cable shielding. This shielding
busbar can also be used as protective ground bar.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-10 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

1RWHWKHIROORZLQJSRLQWVRQIUDPHZDOOPRXQWLQJ
• When mounting on varnished or anodized metal parts, use special contact
washers or remove the insulating layers.
• Provide a large-surface and low-impedance metal-to-metal connection for
fastening the shielding/protective protective ground bar.
• Always touch-protect live mains conductors.
The figure below shows an example of EMC compatible wall-mounting of an S7.

PS
CPU

Figure 12-3 Example of EMC compatible wall-mounting

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-11
$SSHQGL[

 6KLHOGLQJRI&DEOHV

3XUSRVHRIWKHVKLHOGLQJ
A cable is shielded to attenuate the effects of magnetic, electrical and
electromagnetic interference on the cable.

2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOH
Interference currents on cable shielding is diverted to ground conductive
interconnection between the shielding and the cabinet. To avoid interference as a
result of these currents, it is imperative to provide a low-impedance connection to
the protective conductor.

6XLWDEOHFDEOHV
Whenever possible, use cables equipped with a shielding braid. Shielding density
should be at least 80%. Avoid cables with film shielding, because the film can be
easily damaged by tensile or pressure stress, thus reducing its shielding effect.

+DQGOLQJRIWKHVKLHOGLQJ
Note the following points on handling the shielding:
• Always use metal clamps to mount shielding braid. The clamps must contact a
large area of the shielding and provide appropriate contact force.
• Directly behind the cabinet's cable entry, terminate the shielding on a shielding
bus. Then, route the cable to the module; however, do not connect the shielding
once again to ground in this place.
• In installations outside of cabinets (e.g. for wall-mounting) you can also
terminate the shielding on a cable duct.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-12 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

The figure below shows some options for mounting shielded cables, using cable
clamps.

Figure 12-4 Mounting cable shielding

 (TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ

3RWHQWLDOGLIIHUHQFHV
Potential differences can occur between separate system elements. This can result
in high equipotential currents, e.g. if the cable shielding is terminated at both ends
and grounded to different system components.
The cause of potential difference can be differences in the power supplies.

:DUQLQJ
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Always use the prescribed
2
cables (e.g. with a cross-section of 16 mm ). When installing MPI/DP networks,
provide a sufficient conductor cross-section. Otherwise, interface hardware might
get damaged or even be destroyed.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-13
$SSHQGL[

(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQGXFWRU
To reduce potential differences and ensure proper functioning of your electronic
equipment, you must install equipotential bonding conductors.
Note the following points on the use of equipotential bonding conductors:
• The lower the impedance of an equipotential bonding conductor, the more
effective is equipotential bonding.
• When shielded signal cables interconnect two system components and the
shielding is connected on both ends to ground/protective conductors, the
impedance of the additional equipotential bonding conductor must not exceed
10% of the shielding impedance.
• Determine the cross-section of your equipotential bonding conductor on the
basis of the maximum equalizing current that will flow through it. The
equipotential bonding conductor cross-section that has proven best in practice
2
is 16 mm .
• Always use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized
steel. Always connect the cables on a large surface to the equipotential
busbar/protective conductor and protect it against corrosion.
• Route your equipotential bonding conductor to minimize the area between the
equipotential bonding conductor and signal lines as far as possible (see the
figure below).

Figure 12-5 Equipotential bonding

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-14 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 &DEOH5RXWLQJLQVLGH%XLOGLQJV

,QWURGXFWLRQ
Inside buildings (inside and outside cabinets), clearances must be maintained
between groups of different cables to achieve the necessary electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC). The table contains information on the general rules governing
clearances to enable you to choose the right cables.

+RZWRUHDGWKHWDEOH
To find out how to run two cables of different types, proceed as follows:
1. Look up the type of the first cable in column 1 (Cables for ...).
2. Look up the type of the second cable in the corresponding field in column 2
(and cables for ...).
3. Note the applicable directives in column 3 (Run ...).

Table 12-7 Routing cables inside buildings

&DEOHVIRU DQGFDEOHVIRU 5XQ

• Bus signals, shielded • Bus signals, shielded In common bundles or cable
(PROFIBUS) (PROFIBUS) ducts
• Data signals, shielded • Data signals, shielded
(programming devices, (programming devices,
operator panels, printers, operator panels, printers,
counter inputs, etc.) counter inputs, etc.)
• Analog signals, shielded • Analog signals, shielded
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V), • DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V), • Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V), • AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable) • Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC voltage (> 60 V and In separate bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded ducts (no minimum clearance
• AC voltage (> 25 V and necessary)
≤ 400 V), unshielded
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded In separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum clearance
necessary)
RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
On separate cable racks with a
clearance of at least 10 cm

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-15
$SSHQGL[

&DEOHVIRU DQGFDEOHVIRU 5XQ

• DC voltage (> 60 V and • Bus signals, shielded In separate bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded (PROFIBUS) ducts (no minimum clearance
• AC voltage (> 25 V and • Data signals, shielded necessary)
≤ 400 V), unshielded (programming devices,
operator panels, printers,
counter inputs, etc.)
• Analog signals, shielded
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC voltage (> 60 V and In common bundles or cable
≤ 400 V), unshielded ducts
• AC voltage (> 25 V and
≤ 400 V), unshielded
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded In separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum clearance
necessary)
RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
On separate cable racks with a
clearance of at least 10 cm
DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), • Bus signals, shielded LQVLGHFDELQHWV
unshielded (PROFIBUS) In separate bundles or cable
• Data signals, shielded ducts (no minimum clearance
(programming devices, necessary)
operator panels, printers, RXWVLGHFDELQHWV
counter inputs, etc.)
On separate cable racks with a
• Analog signals, shielded clearance of at least 10 cm
• DC voltage (≤ 60 V),
unshielded
• Process signals (≤ 25 V),
shielded
• AC voltage (≤ 25 V),
unshielded
• Monitors (coaxial cable)
• DC and AC voltage (> 400 V), In common bundles or cable
unshielded ducts
ETHERNET ETHERNET In common bundles or cable
ducts
Others In separate bundles or cable
ducts with a clearance of at least
50 cm

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-16 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 2XWGRRUFDEOHURXWLQJ

5XOHVIRU(0&FRPSDWLEOHFDEOHURXWLQJ
The same EMC compatibility rules apply both for indoor and outdoor routing of
cables. The following also applies:
• Running cables on metal cable trays.
• Electrical connection of the joints of cable trays/ducts.
• Ground the cable carriers.
• If necessary, provide adequate equipotential bonding between connected
devices.
• Take the necessary (internal and external) lightning protection and grounding
measures in as far as they are applicable to your particular application.

5XOHVIRUOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQRXWVLGHEXLOGLQJV
Run your cables either:
• in metal conduits grounded at both ends, or
• in concrete cable ducts with continuous end-to-end armoring.

2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHTXLSPHQW
An individual appraisal of the entire plant is necessary before any lightning
protection measures are taken.

$GGLWLRQDOLQIRUPDWLRQRQOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ
can be found in the Lightning and surge voltage protection section.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-17
$SSHQGL[

 /LJKWQLQJDQG6XUJH9ROWDJH3URWHFWLRQ

 ,QWKHIROORZLQJVHFWLRQV
we show you solutions for the protection of your S7-300 against damage as a
result of surge voltage.

2YHUYLHZ
Failures are very often the result of surge voltage caused by:
• Atmospheric discharge or
• Electrostatic discharge.
We will begin by showing you what the theory of surge protection is based on: the
lightning protection zones concept.
At the end of this section, you will find rules for the transition points between
individual lightning protection zones.

1RWH
This section can only provide information on the protection of a PLC against surge
voltage.
However, complete surge protection is guaranteed only if the whole surrounding
building is designed to provide protection against overvoltage. This applies
especially to constructional measures for the building at the planning stage.
If you wish to obtain detailed information on surge protection, we therefore
recommend you contact your Siemens partner or a company specialized in
lightning protection.

 /LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ=RQH&RQFHSW

3ULQFLSDOO\RIWKH/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHFRQFHSWWR,(&
',19'(7
The principle of the lightning protection zone concept states that the volume to be
protected against overvoltage, for example, a manufacturing hall, is subdivided into
lightning protection zones in accordance with EMC directives (see Figure ).
The specific lightning protection zones are formed by the following measures:

Lightning protection of the building exterior (field side) Lightning protection zone 0
Shielding
• Buildings Lightning protection zone 1
• Rooms and/or Lightning protection zone 2
• Devices Lightning protection zone 3

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-18 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

(IIHFWVRIWKH/LJKWQLQJ6WULNH
Direct lightning strikes occur in lightning protection zone 0. Lightning strike
generates high-energy electromagnetic fields which can be reduced or eliminated
from one lightning protection zone to the next by suitable lightning protection
elements/measures.

2YHUYROWDJH
In lightning protection zones 1 and higher, a lightning strike might additionally
cause overvoltage as a result of switching operations, coupling etc.

%ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKHOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHV
The figure below shows a block diagram of the lightning protection zone concept
for a detached building.

Lightning-protection zone 0 (field side)

External Building shield

lightning Lightning-protection zone 1 (Steel reinforcing)
protection
Room shield

Lightning-prot. zone 2 (Steel reinforcing)

Line in
power
Lightning- Device shield
system
protection (Metal casing)
zone 3
Device
Non-electric
Metal line (metallic)
part

Internal
line

Line in information system Lightning-

protection equal
Local potential
equal

Figure 12-6 Lightning protection zones of a building

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-19
$SSHQGL[

3ULQFLSOHRIWKHWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWVEHWZHHQOLJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQ]RQHV
At the transitions points between lightning protection zones, you must take
measures to prevent surges being conducted downstream.
The principle of the lightning protection zone concept also specifies that all cables
which are capable of carrying lightning current (!) and installed at the transition
points of lightning protection zones must be included in the equipotential bonding
system.
Conductors and cables capable of carrying lightning current are:
• Metal pipes (e.g. water, gas and heat)
• Power cables (for example, mains voltage, 24 V supply)
• Data cables (for example, bus cable).

 5XOHVIRUWKH7UDQVLWLRQ3RLQWEHWZHHQ/LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ
=RQHV!

5XOHVIRUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW!/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
The following measures are suitable for lightning protection equipotential bonding
at the transition between lightning protection zones 0 <-> 1:
• Use grounded, spiraled, current-conducting metal straps or metal braiding as a
cable shield at both ends, for example, NYCY or A2Y(K)Y.
• Install cables in one of the following media:
– in continuous metal pipes that are grounded at both ends, or
– in continuously armored concrete ducts or
– on closed metal cable trays grounded at both ends.
– Use fiber optic cables instead of metal conductors.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-20 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

$GGLWLRQDO0HDVXUHV
If you cannot take measures as described above, you must install a high-voltage
protection for your system between the 0 <-> 1 transition points with a lightning
conductor. The table below contains the components you can use for high-voltage
protection of your plant.

Table 12-8 High-voltage protection of cables with surge voltage protection components

&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW! 2UGHU1R

QR ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 031
L1/L2/L3 to PEN
3-phase TN-S system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 031
L1/L2/L3 to PE
1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, N to PE 5SD7 032
3-phase TT system 1x DEHNbloc/3 900 110*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 031
L1/L2/L3 to N
1x DEHNgap B/n 900 130*
N-PE lightning conductor, N
to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 032
L1 +N to PE
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, phase L 5SD7 032
to PEN
AC TT system 1x DEHNbloc/1 900 111*
lightning conductor, phase 5SD7 032
to N
1x DEHNgap B/n 900 130*
N-PE lightning conductor, N
to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT Lightning 918 402*
conductor,
type A D 24 V -
3 MPI bus cable, RS485, RS232 1x Blitzductor CT lightning 919 506* and
(V.24) conductor, type B 919 510*
4 Inputs/outputs of digital modules DEHNrail 24 FML 909 104*
24 V
5 24 VDC power supply module 1x Blitzductor VT 918 402*
lightning conductor, type AD 900 111*
24 V - 5SD7 032
6 Inputs/outputs of digital modules 2x DEHNbloc/1 lightning 900 111*
and 120/230 VAC power supply conductor 5SD7 032
7 Inputs/outputs of analog modules 1x Blitzductor CT lightning 919 506* and
up to 12 V +/- conductor, type B 919 510*
* You can order these components directly from:
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-21
$SSHQGL[

 5XOHVIRUWKH7UDQVLWLRQ3RLQWVEHWZHHQ/LJKWQLQJ3URWHFWLRQ
=RQHV!DQG+LJKHU

5XOHVIRUWUDQVLWLRQSRLQWV!DQGKLJKHUORFDOHTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
The following measures must be taken on all transition points 1 <-> 2 and higher:
• Set up local equipotential bonding at each subsequent lightning protection zone
transition.
• Include all lines (also metal conduits, for example) in the local equipotential
bonding of all subsequent lightning protection zone transition points.
• Include all metal installations located within the lightning protection zone in the
local equipotential bonding (for example, metal part within lightning protection
zone 2 at transition 1 <-> 2).

$GGLWLRQDO0HDVXUHV
We recommend fine-wire fusing for following elements:
• All 1 <-> 2 and greater lightning protection zone transitions
• All cables that run within a lightning protection zone and are longer than 100 m

/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWIRUWKH9'&SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH
Always use the Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V SIMATIC for the 24 VDC power
supply module of the S7-300. All other surge protection components do not meet
the required tolerance range of 20.4 V to 28.8 V of the S7-300 power supply.

/LJKWQLQJ&RQGXFWRUIRU6LJQDO0RGXOHV
You can use standard surge protection components for the digital I/O modules.
However, please note that these only permit a maximum of 26.8 V for a rated
voltage of 24 VDC. If the tolerance of your 24 VDC power supply is higher, use
surge protection components with 30 VDC rating.
You can also use Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V. Note that input current can
increase if negative input voltages are generated.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-22 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

/RZYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWVIRU!
For the transition points between lightning protection zones 1 <-> 2 we recommend
the surge protection components listed in the table below. This low-voltage
protection must be used in S7-300 for CE compliance.

Table 12-9 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection zones 1 <-> 2

&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW 2UGHU1R

QR !ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 3x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TN-S system 4x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TT system 3x DEHNbloc/275 surge arrester, 900 600*
phase L1/L2/L3 to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TT system 1x DEHNguard 275 900 600*
surge arrester, phase L to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C, N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V - 918 402*
3 Bus cable
• MPI, RS485 • Blitzductor CT surge 919 506* and
arrester, type MD/HF 919 570*
• RS232 (V.24) 1x • per conductor pair
Surge arrester Blitzductor 919 506* and
CT type ME 15 V 919 522*
4 Inputs of digital modules 1x Low-voltage surge arrester 919 993*
DC 24 V , type FDK 2 60 V
5 Outputs of digital 1x Low-voltage surge arrester 919 991*
modules 24 V
6 Inputs/outputs of digital 2x Surge arrester
modules
• 120 VAC • DEHNguard 150 900 603*
• 230 VAC • DEHNguard 275 900 600*
7 Inputs of analog 1x Blitzductor CT surge arrester, 919 506* and
modules up to 12 V +/- type MD 12 V 919 541*
* You can order these components directly from:
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-23
$SSHQGL[

/RZYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQHOHPHQWVIRU!
For the transition points between lightning protection zones 2 <-> 3 we recommend
the surge protection components listed in the table below. This low-voltage
protection must be used in S7-300 for CE compliance.

Table 12-10 Surge voltage protection components for lightning protection zones 2 <-> 3

&RQVHF &DEOHVIRU HTXLSWUDQVLWLRQSRLQW 2UGHU1R

QR !ZLWK
1 3-phase TN-C system 3x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TN-S system 4x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
3-phase TT system 3x DEHNbloc/275 surge arrester, 900 600*
phase L1/L2/L3 to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C, N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
AC TN-S system 2x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TN-C system 1x DEHNguard 275 surge 900 600*
arresters 5SD7 030
AC TT system 1x DEHNguard 275 900 600*
surge arrester, phase L to N 5SD7 030
1x DEHNgap C, N-PE surge 900 131*
arrester, N to PE
2 24 VDC Power Supply 1x Blitzductor VT, type AD 24 V - 918 402*
3 Bus cable
• MPI, RS485 • Blitzductor CT surge 919 506* and
arrester, type MD/HF 919 570*
• RS232 (V.24) 1x • per conductor pair
low-voltage surge protection 919 995*
FDK 2 12 V
4 Inputs of digital modules
• 24V DC 1x Low voltage protection 919 993*
, type FDK 2 60 V, on insulated
rail
2x Surge arrester
• 120 VAC • DEHNrail 120 FML 901 101*
• 230 VAC • DEHNrail 230 FML 901 100*
5 Outputs of digital 1x Low-voltage protection 919 991*
modules 24 V FDK 2 D 5 24
6 Outputs of analog 1x Low-voltage protection 919 995*
modules up to 12 V +/- , type FDK 2 12 V, on insulated
rail connected with M- of the
power supply for the modules.
* You can order these components directly from:
DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-24 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 6DPSOHRID6XUJH3URWHFWLRQ&LUFXLWIRU1HWZRUNHG
63/&V

6DPSOHFLUFXLW
The sample in the figure below shows you how install an effective surge protection
for 2 networked S7-300 PLCs:

Lightning-protection zone 0, field side

L1 L3 PE
L2 N Lightning-protection zone 1

2 2
Switchgear cubicle 1 Switchgear cubicle 2
Lightning-protection zone 2 Lightning-protection zone 2

SV CPU SM 4 SV CPU SM 4

MPI MPI
4 4
1
3 5 2 5
PE 10 mm2 PE 10 mm

6 6
3
3

Figure 12-7 Sample circuit for networked S7-300 PLCs

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-25
$SSHQGL[

&RPSRQHQWVLQSUHYLRXVILJXUH
The table below explains consecutive numbers in the figure above:

Table 12-11 Example of a lightning-protected structure (key to figure above)

&RQVHF &RPSRQHQWV 'HVFULSWLRQ

QR
IURP
ILJXUH
DERYH
1 lightning arrestor, depending on the mains High-voltage protection against
system, e.g. TN-S system: direct lightning strike and surge
1 piece DEHNbloc/3, voltage as of transition 0 <-> 1
Order No.: 900 110* and
1 piece DEHNbloc/1,
Order No.: 900 111*
2 surge arresters, High-voltage surge protection at
2 pieces DEHNguard 275; transition 1 <-> 2
Order No.: 900 600*
3 Surge arrester, Low-voltage surge protection for
Blitzductor CT type MD/HF; RS485 interfaces at transition
Order No.: 919 506* and 919 570* 1 <> 2
4 Digital input modules: Low-voltage surge protection,
FDK 2 D 60 V; Order No.: 919 993* signal modules I/O at transition
Digital output modules: FDK 2 D 5, 24 V; 1 <-> 2
Order No.: 919 991*
Analog modules:
MD 12 V Blitzductor CT;
Order No.: 919 506 and 919 541
5 Bus cable shielding mounting device with Discharge of interference current
EMC spring clamp on the basic unit of
Blitzductor CT; Order No.: 919 508*
6 Cable for equipotential bonding: 16 sq. Standardization of reference
mm potentials
7 Blitzductor CT, Type B for building High-voltage surge protection for
transitions; RS485 interfaces at transition 0 <-
Order No.: 919 506* and 919 510* >1

* You can order these components directly from:

DEHN + SÖHNE
GmbH + Co. KG
Elektrotechnische Fabrik
Hans-Dehn-Str. 1
D-92318 Neumarkt

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-26 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 +RZWR3URWHFW'LJLWDO2XWSXW0RGXOHVDJDLQVW,QGXFWLYH6XUJH
9ROWDJH

,QGXFWLYHVXUJHYROWDJH
Overvoltage occurs when inductive devices are switched off. Examples are relay
coils and contactors.

,QWHJUDWHGVXUJHDUUHVWHU
S7-300 digital output modules are equipped with an integrated surge arrester.

$GGLWLRQDORYHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
Inductive devices require additional surge arresters only in following cases:
• If SIMATIC output circuits can be switched off by additionally installed contacts
(e.g. relay contacts).
• If the inductive loads are not controlled by SIMATIC modules
Note: Request information on relevant surge protection rating from the supplier of
inductive devices.

([DPSOH
The figures illustrates an output circuit requiring additional overvoltage protectors.

PS CPU SM SM SM SM SM SM

Contact in the output circuit

Inductivity requires circuiting

Figure 12-8 EMERGENCY-OFF relay contact in the output circuit

Refer also to the rest of the information in this section.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-27
$SSHQGL[

&LUFXLWIRUFRLOVRSHUDWHGZLWK'&YROWDJH
The figure below shows DC-operated coils equipped with diode or Zener diode
circuit.

with diode with Zener diode

+ +

- -

Figure 12-9 Circuit for coils operated with DC voltage

Diode/Zener diode circuits have the following characteristics:

• Opening surge voltage can be totally avoided.
The Zener diode has a higher switch-off voltage capacity.
• High switch-off delay (6 to 9 times higher than without protective circuit).
The Zener diode switches off faster than a diode circuit.

&LUFXLWIRUFRLOVRSHUDWHGZLWK$&YROWDJH
The figure shows coils operated with AC voltage and varistor or RC circuit.

with varistor with RC element

~ ~

~ ~

Figure 12-10 Circuit for coils operated with AC voltage

The characteristics of varistor circuits are:

• The amplitude of the opening surge is limited rather than attenuated.
• The surge rise-ratio remains the same
• Short off-delay.
The characteristics of RC circuits are:
• Amplitude and steepness of the opening surge are reduced.
• Short off-delay.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-28 A5E00105492-03
 $SSHQGL[

 6DIHW\RIHOHFWURQLFFRQWUROHTXLSPHQW

,QWURGXFWLRQ
The notes below apply independent of the type or manufacturer of the electronic
control.

5HOLDELOLW\
Maximum reliability of SIMATIC devices and components is achieved by
implementing extensive and cost-effective measures during development and
manufacture:
This includes the following:
• Use of high-quality components;
• Worst-case design of all circuits;
• Systematic and computer-aided testing of all components;
• Burn-in of all large-scale integrated circuits (e.g. processors, memory, etc.);
• Measures preventing static charge when handling MOS ICs;
• Visual checks at different stages of manufacture;
• Continuous heat-run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of
several days;
• Careful computer-controlled final testing;
• Statistical evaluation of all returned systems and components to enable the
immediate initiation of suitable corrective measures;
• Monitoring of major control components, using on-line tests (watchdog for the
CPU, etc.).
These measures are referred to in safety technology as basic measures. They
prevent or rectify a large proportion of possible faults.



S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 12-29
$SSHQGL[

5LVNV
In all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury
to persons, special measures must be taken to enhance the safety of the
installation - and therefore also of the situation. System-specific and special
regulations exist for such applications. They must be observed on installing the
control system (e.g. VDE 0116 for burner control systems).
For electronic control equipment with a safety function, the measures that have to
be taken to prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the
installation. As of a certain degree of hazard the basic measures mentioned above
are no longer sufficient. That is, additional measures (e.g. redundant
configurations, tests, checksums etc.) must be implemented and certified for the
control equipment (DIN VDE 0801). The prototype of the fail-safe PLC S5-95F was
tested by TÜV (German Institute for Technological Surveillance), BIA and G EM III;
several certificates have been granted. Thus, it is suitable in the same way as the
previously tested fail-safe PLC S5-115F to control and monitor safety-relevant
system areas.

6SOLWWLQJWKHJURXSLQWRVDIHW\UHOHYDQWDUHDVDQGDUHDVZKLFKDUHQRWVDIHW\
UHOHYDQW
Most plants contain equipment performing safety-relevant operations (e.g.
EMERGENCY-OFF switch, protective gates, two-hand controls). To avoid the need
to examine the entire controller from the aspect of safety, WKHFRQWUROOHULVXVXDOO\
GLYLGHGLQWRDQDUHDWKDWLVVDIHW\UHOHYDQWDQGDQDUHDWKDWLVQRWVDIHW\
UHOHYDQW In the non-safety--related area, no special demands are placed on the
safety of the control equipment because any failure in the electronics will have no
effect on the safety of the installation. In the safety-relevant area, however, it is
only allowed to operate controllers or circuits compliant with corresponding
regulations.
The following divisions are common in practical situations:
• For control equipment with few safety-related functions (e.g. machine controls)
The conventional PLC is responsible for machine control, whereas safety-
related functions are implemented with a fail-safe mini PLC (e.g. S5-95F).
• For controllers with balanced areas (e.g. chemical installations, cable cars)
The non-secure area is implemented with a conventional PLC, while the secure
area requires a tested, fail-safe controller (S7-300F, S7-400F, S7-400FH,
S5-115F or several S5-95Fs).
The entire installation is implemented with a fail-safe control system.
• For control equipment with mainly safety-relevant functions (e.g. burner control
systems)
The entire control system is implemented with fail-safe technology.

,PSRUWDQW,QIRUPDWLRQ
The instructions in the operating manual MUST be followed, even if the electronic
control equipment has been configured for maximum design safety - e.g. with a
multi-channel structure. Incorrect handling can render measures intended to
prevent dangerous faults ineffective, or generate additional sources of danger.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
12-30 A5E00105492-03


*ORVVDU\

$FFXPXODWRU
The Æ CPU uses the accumulator registers as intermediate memory for load,
transfer, comparison, calculation and conversion operations.

$GGUHVV
An address represents the ID for a specific address or address range. Example:
Input I12.1; Memory bit word MW25; Data block DB3.

$QDORJ0RGXOH
Analog modules convert process values (e.g. temperature) into digital values, so
that they can be processed by the central processing unit, or convert digital values
into analog manipulated variables.

%DFNSODQH%XV
The backplane bus is a serial data bus. It supplies power to the modules and is
also used by the modules to communicate with each other. Bus connectors
interconnect the modules.

EDFNXS0HPRU\
The back-up memory provides a back-up of memory areas for the Æ CPU without
a back-up battery. It backs up a configurable number of timers, counters, memory
bits, data bytes and retentive timers, counters, memory bits and data bytes).

%XV
A bus is a communication medium connecting several nodes. Data can be
transferred via serial or parallel circuits, that is, via electrical conductors or fiber
optic.

%XVVHJPHQW
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments
are interconnected using repeaters.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-1
*ORVVDU\

&KDVVLVJURXQG
Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of
equipment on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

&ORFNPHPRU\ELWV
Memory bit which can be used to generate clock pulses in the user program
(1 byte per memory bit).

1RWH
Note in the case of S7-300 CPUs that the clock memory byte is not overwritten in
the user program.

&RGH%ORFN
A SIMATIC S7 code block contains part of the 67(3 user program. (In contrast:
a Æ Data Block (DB) only contains data.)

&RPPXQLFDWLRQSURFHVVRU
Communication processors are modules for point-to-point and bus communication.

&RPSUHVV
The programming device online function “Compress” is used to align all valid
blocks contiguously in the RAM of the CPU at the start of the user memory. This
eliminates all gaps which arose when blocks were deleted or modified.

&RQILJXUDWLRQ
Assignment of modules to racks/slots and (e.g. for signal modules) addresses.

&RQVLVWHQWGDWD
Data whose contents are related and which should not be separated are known as
consistent data.
For example, the values of analog modules must always be handled consistently,
that is the value of an analog module must not be corrupted by reading it out at two
different times.

&RXQWHUV
Counters are part of CPU --> system memory. The content of "Counter cells" can
be modified by 67(3 instructions (e.g. up/down count).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-2 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

&3
--> Communication processor

&38
Central processing unit of the S7 programmable controller with open and closed-
loop control systems, memory, operating system and interface for programming
device.

&38RSHUDWLQJV\VWHP
The CPU OS organizes all functions and processes of the CPU which are not
associated to a specific control task.

&\FOH7LPH
The term cycle time describes the time required by a Æ CPU to run through a
Æ user program on

'DWDEORFN
Data blocks (DB) are data areas in the user program which contain user data.
Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks while instance data blocks
are assigned to a specific FB call.

'DWDVWDWLF
Static data is data which can only be used within a function block. The data is
saved in an instance data block belonging to the function block. The data stored in
the instance data block is retained until the next function block call.

'DWDWHPSRUDU\
Temporary data is local data of a block that is stored in the L stack during block
execution and no longer available after execution.

'HOD\,QWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Delay

'LDJQRVWLFEXIIHU
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostic
events are stored in the order of their occurrence.

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-3
*ORVVDU\

'LDJQRVWLF,QWHUUXSW
Modules capable of diagnostics operations report detected system errors to the
Æ CPU via diagnostic interrupts.

'LDJQRVWLFV
Æ System Diagnostics

'3PDVWHU
A Æ master which behaves in accordance with EN 50170, Part 3 is known as a
DP master.

'3VODYH
A Æ slave operated on PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS-DP protocol and in
accordance with EN 50170, Part 3 is referred to as DP slave.

'39
The designation DPV1 means the extended functions of the acyclical services (to
include new interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1
functionality has been incorporated into IEC 61158/EN 50170, volume 2,
PROFIBUS.

(OHFWULFDOO\LVRODWHG
The reference potential of the control and on-load power circuits for isolated I/Os is
galvanically separated; e.g. by optocouplers, relay contact or transformer.
Input/output circuits can be connected to a common potential.

(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) which gives the bodies of
electrical equipment and external conducting bodies the same or approximately the
same potential, in order to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages from being
generated between these bodies.

(UURUGLVSOD\
One of the possible responses of the operating system to a Æ runtime error is to
display the error. The other possible responses are: Æ error response in the user
program, CPU STOP.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-4 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

(UURUKDQGOLQJYLD2%
When the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. access error with
67(3), it calls a dedicated organization block (Error OB) that determines
subsequent CPU response.

(UURUUHVSRQVH
Response to a Æ runtime error. The operating system can respond in the following
ways: transition of the PLC to STOP mode, call of an organization block in which
the user can program an error response or display.

([WHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\
Power supply for the signal and function modules and the I/O connected to them.

)%
Æ Function Block

)&
Æ Function

)ODVK(3520
FEPROMs are the same as electrically erasable EEPROMS in that they can retain
data in the event of a power failure, but they can be erased much more quickly
(FEPROM = Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory). They are used on
Æ Memory Cards.

)ORDWLQJSRWHQWLDO
No galvanic connection to ground.

)25&(
The Force function is used to assign fixed values to certain variables from a user
program or CPU (including I/Os).
In this context, please note the limitations listed in the 2YHUYLHZRIWKHWHVW
IXQFWLRQVsection in the chapter entitled 7HVWIXQFWLRQVGLDJQRVWLFVDQG
WURXEOHVKRRWLQJin the 6,QVWDOODWLRQmanual

)XQFWLRQ
According to IEC 1131-3 a function is a Æ code block that contains no Æ statical
data. A function allows parameters to be passed in the user program. Functions
are therefore suitable for programming frequently occurring complex functions,
e.g. calculations.

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-5
*ORVVDU\

)XQFWLRQEORFN
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block is a Æ code block that contains Æ static
data. An FB allows parameters to be passed in the user program. Function blocks
are therefore suitable for programming complex functions, e.g. closed-loop
controls, mode selections, which are repeated frequently.

)XQFWLRQDOJURXQGLQJ
Grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of
electrical equipment. With functional grounding you short-circuit interference
voltage which would otherwise have an unacceptable impact on equipment.

*'FLUFXLW
A GD circle encompasses a number of CPUs which exchange data by means of
global data communication and which are used as follows:
• One CPU broadcasts a GD packet to the other CPUs.
• One CPU sends and receives a GD packet from another CPU.
A GD circuit is identified by a GD circuit number.

*'(OHPHQW
A GD element is generated by assigning shared Æ global data. It is identified by a
unique global data ID in the global data table.

*'SDFNHW
A GD packet can consist of one or more GD objects which are transmitted together
in a frame.

*OREDOGDWD
Global data can be addressed by any Æ code block (FC, FB, OB). Individually,
these are markers M, inputs I, outputs Q, timers, counters, and data blocks DB.
Global data can be accessed with either absolute or symbolic access.

*OREDOGDWDFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
Global data communication is a procedure used to transfer Æ global data between
CPUs (without CFBs).

*URXQG
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any
point.
Ground potential can be different to zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The
term “reference ground” is frequently used to describe this situation.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-6 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

*URXQGWR
To ground means to connect an electrically conducting component to the
grounding electrode (one or more conducting components which have a very good
contact with the earth) across a grounding system.

*6'ILOHGHYLFHPDVWHUILOH
The device master file (GSD file) stores all slave specific properties. The GSD file
format is specified in EN 50170,Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

,QVWDQFHGDWDEORFN
A DB is automatically generated and assigned to every function block in the
67(3 user program. The values of the input, output and in/out parameters are
stored in the instance data block, together with local block data.

,QWHUIDFHPXOWLSRLQW
Æ MPI

,QWHUUXSW
The CPU's Æ operating system knows 10 different priority classes for controlling
user program execution. These priority classes include interrupts, such as process
interrupts. When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls
an assigned OB. In this OB the user can program the desired response (for
example in an FB).

,QWHUUXSW'HOD\
The delay interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes when processing
programs in SIMATIC S7. It is started on expiration of a time generated in the user
program. A corresponding organization block is then executed.

,QWHUUXSWGLDJQRVWLF
Æ Diagnostic interrupt

,QWHUUXSW3URFHVV
Æ Process interrupt

,QWHUUXSWVWDWXV
A status interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB55 to be
called on the DPV1 master. For detailed information on OB55, see the 5HIHUHQFH
0DQXDO6\VWHPVRIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-7
*ORVVDU\

,QWHUUXSWWLPHRIGD\
The time-of-day interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in SIMATIC S7
program processing. It is generated depending on a specific date (or daily) and
time-of-day (e.g. 9:50 or hourly, or every minute). A corresponding organization
block is then executed.

,QWHUUXSWXSGDWH
An update interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave and causes OB 56 to be
called on the DPV1 master. For detailed information on OB 56, see the 5HIHUHQFH
0DQXDO6\VWHPVRIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"

,QWHUUXSWYHQGRUVSHFLILF
A vendor-specific interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave. It causes OB57 to
be called on the DPV1 master.
Detailed information on OB 57 can be found in the 5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO6\VWHP
6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQV"

,QWHUUXSWZDWFKGRJ
A watchdog interrupt is generated periodically by the CPU in a configurable time
pattern. A corresponding Æ organization block is then executed.

/RDGPHPRU\
Load memory is part of the CPU. It contains objects generated by the programming
device. It is implemented either as a plug-in Memory Card or permanently
integrated memory.

/RFDOGDWD
Æ Data, temporary

0DLQPHPRU\
Work memory is a RAM memory in the Æ CPU accessed by the processor during
user program execution.

0DVWHU
Masters in possession of the Æ Token can send/request data to/from other nodes
(= active node).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-8 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

0HPRU\ELWV
Memory bits are part of the CPU's Æ system memory. They store intermediate
results of calculations. They can be accessed in bit, byte, word or doubleword
units.

0HPRU\&DUG0&
Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs. They are implemented in the
form of Æ RAM or Æ FEPROM. An MC differs from an Æ Micro Memory Card only
in its dimensions (MC is approximately the size of a credit card).

0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG00&
Micro Memory Cards are memory media for CPUs and CPs. Its smaller dimensions
form the only difference compared to the Æ Memory Card.

0RGXOH3DUDPHWHUV
Module parameters are values which can be used to control the response of the
module. A distinction is made between static and dynamic module parameters.

03,
This interface is capable of multipoint communication (MPI). It forms part of the
SIMATIC S7 PG interface. It enables multiple-node operation (PGs, text-based
displays, OPs) on one or several PLCs. Each node is identified by a unique
address (MPI address).

03,DGGUHVV
Æ MPI

1HVWLQJGHSWK
One block can be called from another by means of a block call. Nesting depth is
defined as the number of simultaneously called Æ code blocks.

1RQLVRODWHG
The reference potential of the control and on-load power circuits for non-isolated
I/Os is electrically interconnected.

2%
Organization Blocks

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-9
*ORVVDU\

2%SULRULW\
The CPU Æ operating system distinguishes between different priority classes, e.g.
cyclic program execution, program execution controlled by process interrupt. Each
priority class is assigned Æ organization blocks (OB) in which the S7 user can
program a response. The OBs have different standard priorities which determine
the order in which they are executed or interrupted in the event that they are
activated simultaneously.

2SHUDWLQJPRGH
SIMATIC S7 PLC operating modes are: STOP, Æ START-UP, RUN.

2UJDQL]DWLRQ%ORFNV
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between CPU operating system and
the user program. The processing sequence of the user program is defined in the
organization blocks.

3DUDPHWHUV
1. Variable of a 67(3 code block
2. Variable for declaring module response (one or several per module). All modules
have a suitable basic factory setting which can be customized in 67(3.
There are Æ static parameters and Æ dynamic parameters

3DUDPHWHUVG\QDPLF
Unlike static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during
operation by calling an SFC in the user program, for example limit values of an
analog signal input module.

3DUDPHWHUVVWDWLF
Unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by
the user program. You can only modify these parameters by editing your
configuration in 67(3, e.g. modification of input delay parameters of a digital
signal input module.

3*
Æ Programming device

3/&
An automation system in the context of SIMATIC S7 Æ is a programmable logic
controller.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-10 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

3/&
Æ Programmable controller

3ULRULW\FODVV
The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 26 priority classes (or "Program
execution levels"). Specific OBs are assigned to these classes. The priority classes
determine which OBs interrupt other OBs. If a priority class includes several OBs,
they do not interrupt each other, but are executed sequentially.

3URFHVV,PDJH
The process image is part of CPU Æ system memory. At the start of cyclic program
execution, the signal states at the input modules are written to the process image
of the inputs. At the end of cyclic program execution, the signal status of the
process image of the outputs is transferred to the output modules.

3URFHVVLQWHUUXSW
A process interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a
specific event in the process. The process interrupt is reported to the CPU. The
assigned Æ organization block is then processed, according to interrupt priority.

3URGXFWYHUVLRQ
The product version identifies differences between products which have the same
order number. The product version is incremented when forward-compatible
functions are enhanced, after production-related modifications (use of new
parts/components) and for bug fixes.

352),%86'3
The PLC distributes controls for digital, analog and intelligent modules as well as a
wide range of field devices to EN 50170, part 3, for example, drives or valve
blocks, to processes at external locations - even across distances exceeding
23 km.
The modules and field devices are connected to the programmable controller via
the PROFIBUS-DP fieldbus and addressed in the same way as centralized I/Os.

3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH
Programming devices are essentially personal computers which are compact,
portable and suitable for industrial applications. They are equipped with special
hardware and software for SIMATIC PLCs.

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-11
*ORVVDU\

3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROOHU
Programmable controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose function is
saved as a program in the control unit. The configuration and wiring of the unit are
therefore independent of the function of the control system. The PLC has a
computer structure; it consists of the Æ CPU (Central Processing Unit) with
memories, I/O modules and internal bus system. The I/Os and the programming
language are oriented to control engineering needs.

5$0
RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor read/write memory.

5HIHUHQFHJURXQG
Æ Ground

5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
Potential with reference to which the voltages of participating circuits are observed
and/or measured.

5HWHQWLYLW\
A memory area is retentive if its contents are retained even after a power failure
and a change from STOP to RUN. The non-retentive area of memory markers,
timers and counters is reset following a power failure and a transition from the
STOP mode to the RUN mode.
The following can be made retentive:
• flag bits
• S7 timers
• S7 counters
• Data areas

5HVWDUW
On CPU startup (e.g. after is switched from STOP to RUN mode via selector switch
or with POWER ON), OB100 (restart) is initially executed, prior to cyclic program
execution (OB1). On restart, the input process image is read in and the 67(3
user program is executed, starting at the first instruction in OB 1.

5XQWLPHHUURU
Errors occurred in the PLC (that is, not in the process itself) during user program
execution.

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-12 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

6FDQUDWH
The reduction rate determines the send/receive frequency for Æ GD packets on
the basis of the CPU cycle.

6)%
Æ System function block

6)&
Æ System function

6HJPHQW
Æ Bus Segment

6LJQDOPRGXOH
Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the PLC. There
are digital and analog I/O modules (input/output module, digital or analog).
(input/output module, analog)

6ODYH
A slave may only exchange data with the Æ Master on request.

67$5783
A STARTUP routine is executed at the transition from STOP to RUN mode. Can be
triggered by the Æ mode selector switch or after power on, or by an operator action
on the programming device. An S7–300 performs Æ a restart.

67(3
Programming language for developing user programs for SIMATIC S7 PLCs.

6XEVWLWXWHYDOXH
Substitute values are configurable values which output modules transfer to the
process when the CPU switches to STOP mode.
In the event of an input access error, a substitute value can be written to the
accumulator instead of the input value which could not be read (SFC 44).

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-13
*ORVVDU\

6\VWHP'LDJQRVWLFV
System diagnostics refers to the detection, evaluation and signaling of errors which
occur within the PLC, for example, program errors or module errors. System errors
can be displayed with LED indicators or in 67(3.

6\VWHPIXQFWLRQ
A system function (SFC) is a Æ function integrated in the operating system of the
CPU that can be called, as required, in the STEP 7 user program.

6\VWHP)XQFWLRQV%ORFN
A System Function Block (SFB) is a Æ function block integrated in the CPU
operating system. If required, it can be called in the STEP 7 user program.

6\VWHPPHPRU\
The system memory (RAM) is integrated on the central processing unit. System
memory contains the address areas (e.g. timers, counters, memory bits) and the
data areas required internally by the --> operating system (e.g. buffers for
communication).

6\VWHPVWDWHOLVW
The system status list contains data describing the current status of an S7-300.
You can always use this list to obtain an overview of:
• The S7-300 configuration
• The current CPU configuration and the configurable signal modules
• Current status and processes in the CPU and configurable signal modules.

7HUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU
A terminating resistor is used to terminate data links in order to prevent reflections.

7LPHU
Æ Timer

7LPHUV
Timers are part of CPU Æ system memory. The content of “timer cells” is
automatically updated by the operating system, asynchronously to the user
program. 67(3 instructions are used to define the exact function of the timer
cells (for example on-delay) and initiate their execution (e.g. start).

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-14 A5E00105492-03
 *ORVVDU\

7LPHRIGD\LQWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Time-of-day

7RNHQ
Bus access rights

7UDQVPLVVLRQUDWH
Data transfer rate (in bps)

8VHU3URJUDP
The SIMATIC system distinguishes between the Æ CPU operating system and
user programs. The latter are created with Æ 67(3 programming software, using
optional programming languages (LAD and STL). User programs are stored in
code blocks. data is stored in data blocks.

8VHUPHPRU\
User memory contains Æ code and Æ data blocks of the user program. The user
memory can be integrated in the CPU or can be provided on plug-in memory cards
or memory modules. However, user programs are always executed from Æ CPU
main memory.

9DULVWRU
voltage-dependent resistor

:DWFKGRJ,QWHUUXSW
Æ Interrupt, Watchdog

S7-300 Automation Systems, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 13-15
*ORVVDU\

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
13-16 A5E00105492-03


,QGH[
$ &
Accessories cabinet
wiring 7-1 Selecting and dimensioning 5-11
Accessories 6-2 Cabinet
Accumulator 13-1 dimensions 5-12
Actuator/sensor interface 5-31 power loss dissipated 5-14
Address 13-1 types 5-13
addresses Cable lengths
analog modules 8-5 longer 5-42
Addresses maximum 5-40
Digital modules 8-3 MPI subnet 5-41
technological functions 8-6 PROFIBUS subnet 5-41
Addressing stub cables 5-42
slotbased 8-1 Cable routing inside buildings 12-15
slot-based 8-1 Cable shielding 12-12
user-defined 8-1, 8-3 ground 5-24
Analog Module 13-1 Cables
analog modules preparing 7-10
addresses 8-5 Central unit 5-2
Arrangement Chassis ground 13-2
of modules 5-7 Clearances 5-6
Asynchronous error 11-4 Code Block 13-2
commissioning
% Recommended procedure with the
Backplane Bus 13-1 hardware 9-2
Back-up Commissioning
operating system 10-2 checklist 9-4
back-up memory 13-1 CPU 31x-2 DP as DP master 9-23
Basic knowledge required 1-1 CPU 31x-2 DP as DP slave 9-26
Bus 13-1 CPU 31xC-2 DP as DP master 9-23
Backplane 13-1 CPU 31xC-2 DP as DP slave 9-26
Bus cables PROFIBUS DP 9-22
wiring rules 5-39 response to errors 9-3
Bus connector 5-39 software requirement 9-1
connecting the bus cable 7-17 using the software 9-3
connecting to module 7-18 Compress 13-2
removing 7-18 Configuration 13-2
setting the terminating resistor 7-18 Connecting
Bus connectors PG 9-6
plugging 6-8 sensors and actors 7-8
Bus segment 13-1 spring terminals 7-8
Bus termination 5-49 Connecting actors 7-8
BUSF Connecting cables
LED 11-10 for interface modules 5-8
BUSF1 Connecting sensors 7-8
LED 11-10 Consistent data 8-8, 13-2
BUSF2 controlling and monitoring variables
LED 11-10 Controlling outputs in CPU STOP mode
9-21

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 1
*ORVVDU\

Counters 13-2 DP slave 13-4

CPU DPV1 13-4
operating system 13-3
resetting CPU memory 9-13 (
wiring 7-7 Electrically isolated 13-4
CPU 313C-2 DP EMC
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 definition 12-3
commissioning as DP-Slave 9-27 EMC correct grounding 12-7
CPU 314C-2 DP EMC error-free installation 12-7
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 EMC grounded installation, example 12-9
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 Equipotential bonding 13-4
CPU 315-2 DP Equipotential bonding - lightning protection
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 12-20
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 Equipotential bonding conductor 5-24
CPU 316-2 DP Error
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 asynchronous 11-4
CPU 317-2 DP synchronous 11-4
commissioning as a DP master 9-24 Error display 13-4
CPU 318-2 DP Error displays
commissioning as DP slave 9-27 DP-compliant CPUs 11-10
Cycle time 13-3 Error handling 11-4
Error response 13-5
'
error-free operation of a S7-300 12-1
data Event recognition 11-14, 11-20
static 13-3 Expansion module 5-2
Data
consistent 13-2 )
temporary 13-3 Floating potential 13-5
Data block 13-3 Force 13-5
Default addressing 8-1 Forcing 11-2
Delay Interrupt 13-7 Front connector
Device-related diagnostics 11-27 encoding 7-12
Diagnostic addresses inserting 7-12
when directly exchanging data 11-15 preparing 7-10
Diagnostic addresses 11-13, 11-19 wiring 7-3, 7-11
Diagnostic buffer 11-5, 13-3 front connector coding
Diagnostic Interrupt 13-4 remove from front connector 10-7
Diagnostics front connector coding pin
as DP slave 11-15 remove from module 10-6
configured address area 11-25 Full assembly 5-10
device-related 11-27 Function
System 13-14 FC 13-5
with "hardware diagnostics" 11-6 Function block
Diagnostics FB 13-6
as DP-Master 11-12 Functional grounding 13-6
with LEDs 11-7 Further support 1-4
with system functions 11-5
Digital modules *
Addresses 8-3
GD circuit 13-6
digital output module
GD element 13-6
replacement fuses 10-9
GD packet 13-6
replacing fuses 10-10
Global data 13-6
Dimensions
Ground 13-6, 13-7
of modules 5-4
ground conductor
Direct data exchange 9-32
fixing the ground conductor 6-4
DP master 13-4
Grounding concept 5-20
interrupts 11-21

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
2 A5E00105492-03
 

GSD file (device master file) 13-7 Load circuits

ground 5-24
+ Load current
Highest MPI address 5-33 determining 5-28
Highest PROFIBUS DP address 5-33 load memory 13-8
Load voltage
, connecting the reference potential of the
load voltage 5-25
Inscription labels 6-2
Local data 13-8
installation
Local equipotential bonding 12-22
horizontal 5-3
vertical 5-3 0
Installation
arranging modules 5-7 Main memory 13-8
grounded reference potential 5-18 Mains voltage selector switch 7-5
in cabinets 5-11 Material
ungrounded reference potential 5-19 required 6-3
Installing memory
the module 10-7 System 13-14
the modules 6-8 User 13-15
Installing EMC plants 12-3 Memory
Instance data block 13-7 back-up 13-1
Interface modules Load 13-8
connecting cables 5-8 main 13-8
interfaces Memory bits 13-9
MPI interface 5-35 Memory Card
Which devices can I connect to which backing up operating system 10-2
interface? 5-37 Memory reset
Interfaces with mode selector 9-13
PROFIBUS DP interface 5-36 Micro Memory Card
PtP interface 5-36 backing up operating system 10-2
Intermediate memory 9-28 inserting 9-10
Internet 1-6 replacing 9-10
interrupt Mode selector
Process 13-11 memory reset with 9-13
Update interrupt 13-8 Modifying
Interrupt 13-7 of variables 11-1
Delay 13-7 module
diagnostic 13-4 Installing 10-7
on the DP master 11-21 removing 10-5
status interrupt 13-7 replacing 10-4
time-of-day 13-8 Module
vendor-specific interrupt 13-8 arrangement 5-7, 5-9
watchdog- 13-8 dimensions 5-4
Interrupt, time-of-day 13-8 installation 6-8
Interrupt, watchdog 13-8 labeling 7-13
start addresses 8-1
/ Module diagnostics 11-25
Module Parameters 13-9
labeling strips
module replacement
assignment to modules 7-13
controlling 10-4
inserting 7-13
Modules
LED 11-10
isolated 5-20
Lightning protection equipotential bonding
non-isolated 5-20
12-20
Monitor and control variable
Lightning protection zone concept 12-18
Setting the trigger points 9-19
Load
monitor and control variables
from PS 307 5-29
controlling variables 9-19

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 3
*ORVVDU\

Monitoring Point-to-Point
of variables 11-1 maximum baud rate 5-32
monitoring and controlling variables maximum possible number of nodes
Establishing a connection to the CPU 5-32
9-21 Point-to-point communication 5-31
Opening the VAT 9-20 Potential differences 5-24, 12-13
Saving the VAT 9-20 Power on
Monitoring and controlling variables requirements 9-12
monitoring variables 9-19 Power supply
Mountable shielding terminals 5-5 grounded 5-16
MPI 13-9 Power supply module
maximum baud rate 5-32 selecting mains voltage 7-5
maximum possible number of nodes power up
5-32 initial 9-12
MPI Subnet 5-30 priority
MPI address OB 13-10
default 5-33 Priority class 13-11
highest 5-33 Process Image 13-11
recommendations 5-34 process interrupt 13-11
rules 5-33 Product version 13-11
MPI and PROFIBUS subnet 5-46 PROFIBUS bus cable 5-38
MPI interface 5-35 PROFIBUS address
MPI subnet recommendation 5-34
example 5-43 PROFIBUS and MPI subnet 5-46
maximum distances 5-44 PROFIBUS bus cable
segment 5-41 properties 5-38
terminating resistor 5-48 PROFIBUS DP 13-11
commissioning 9-22
1 Direct data exchange 9-32
Nesting depth 13-9 maximum baud rate 5-32
Noise maximum possible number of nodes
electromagnetic 12-3 5-32
Non-isolated 13-9 PROFIBUS DP address
highest 5-33
2 rules 5-33
PROFIBUS DP addresses
OB 13-10
default 5-33
OB priority 13-10
PROFIBUS DP interface 5-36
Open components 6-1
PROFIBUS DP subnet 5-30
Operating mode 13-10
PROFIBUS subnet
Operating system
cable lengths 5-41
back-up 10-2
example 5-45
back-up on Memory Card 10-2
PROFIBUS Terminator 5-49
back-up on Micro Memory Card 10-2
Protect digital output modules from
CPU 13-3
inductive surge 12-27
updating 10-3
protective conductor
Organization Blocks 13-10
connecting to the rail 7-4
Outdoor routing of cables 12-17
Protective ground
3 measures 5-23
Protective measures
Parameters 13-10 for overall system 5-17
Module 13-9 PtP interface 5-36
PG Purpose of this documentation 1-1
access across network boundaries 5-47
connecting 9-6
ungrounded installation 9-9
via stub cable to subnet 9-8

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
4 A5E00105492-03
 

SIMATIC Manager 9-17

5 start 9-17
rail SINEC L2-DP 13-11
ground conductor 6-4 single-step mode 11-1
preparing 6-4 Slave diagnostics
Rail reading 11-15
connecting the protective conductor 7-4 reading, example 11-17
mounting hole dimensions 6-5 structure 11-22
rails slot number
fixing screws 6-5 assign 6-9
versions 6-3 insert 6-10
Rails Slot number label 6-2
length 5-4 Slot-based addressing 8-1
Reference potential Start-up 13-13
grounded 5-18 CPU 31x-2 DP as a DP master 9-24
ungrounded 5-19 CPU 31x-2 DP as a DP slave 9-27
Repeater CPU 31xC-2 DP as a DP master 9-24
RS485 5-40 CPU 31xC-2 DP as a DP slave 9-27
replacing Station status 11-23
module 10-4 Status display
replacing DP-compliant CPUs 11-10
fuses 10-10 Status interrupt 13-7
Replacing a module Strain relief 7-11
behavior of S7-300 10-8 Stub cables
replacing fuses length 5-42
digital output module 10-10 Subnets 5-30
Resetting CPU memory 9-13 Substitute value 13-13
Resetting memory Support 1-6
MPI parameter 9-15 surge protection, example 12-25
Restart 13-12 Synchronous error 11-4
Retentivity 13-12 System Diagnostics 13-14
Routing 5-47 System function
Routing a potential difference cable 12-13 SFC 13-14
RS485 System Function Block
bus connector 5-39 SFB 13-14
RS485 repeater 5-40 System memory 13-14
Rules and regulations for error-free
7
operation 12-1
Runtime error 13-12 Terminating resistor 13-14
MPI subnet 5-48
6 setting on the bus connector 7-18
S7-300 Timers 13-14
initial power up 9-12 Tool
Scan rate 13-13 required 6-3
Scope of the manual 1-1 Training Center 1-4
Segment 5-32
8
in the MPI subnet 5-41
in the PROFIBUS subnet 5-41 Ungrounded installation
Service 1-6 connecting PG 9-9
SF uninstalling
LED, evaluation 11-8 the modules 10-5
Shielding cables 12-12 update interrupt 13-8
Shielding contact element 5-5, 7-14 Updating
mounting 7-14 operating system 10-3
Shielding terminal User memory 13-15
laying cables 7-15 User Program 13-15
Signal module 13-13 User-defined addressing 8-1, 8-3

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
A5E00105492-03 5
*ORVVDU\

9 Voltage
selecting mains voltage 7-5
variable monitoring or control
create variable table 9-18 :
variables
Wiring
modifying 11-1
accessories required 7-1
monitoring 11-1
front connector 7-11
Variables
front connectors 7-3
forcing 11-2
PS and CPU 7-2, 7-6
Vendor ID 11-24
required tools and materials 7-2
Vendor-specific interrupt 13-8
rules 7-2

S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
6 A5E00105492-03